Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AWord to Mazda Owners
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is
necessary, that's the place to go.
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best
possible service.
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.
Mazda North American Operations
Important Notes About This Manual
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. In the event of a crash, this device records data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur and lead to the designing of safer
vehicles.
Air Conditioning and the Environment
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not to
damage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Perchlorate
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ...] may
contain Perchlorate Material– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
©2007 Mazda North American Operations
Printed in U.S.A. (Print1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Use This Manual
We want to help you get the most driving
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's
manual, when read from cover to cover,
can do that in many ways.
NOTE
A NOTE provides information and sometimes
suggests how to make better use of your
vehicle.
The symbol below, located on some parts
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual
contains information related to the part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.
Illustrations complement the words of the
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
Mazda. By reading your manual, you can
find out about the features, important
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions.
The symbol below in this manual means
“Do not do this” or “Do not let this
happen”.
Index: A good place to start is the Index,
an alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
You'll find several WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to
your vehicle, or both, could result if
the caution is ignored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Essential Safety Equipment
2
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint
systems and SRS air bags.
Knowing Your Mazda
3
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment
of various parts.
Before Driving Your Mazda
4
Important information about driving your Mazda.
Driving Your Mazda
5
Explanation of instruments and controls.
Interior Comfort
6
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
In Case of an Emergency
7
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.
Maintenance and Care
8
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
9
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
Specifications
10
11
Technical information about your Mazda.
Index
Navigation System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Dashboard and Interior Overview .............................................. 1-2
Exterior Overview ......................................................................... 1-4
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Dashboard and Interior Overview
*Refer to Navigation System at the end of the manual (if equipped).
Power window lock switch ................................................................................ page 3-26
Power window switches .................................................................................... page 3-23
Power door lock switch ....................................................................................... page 3-9
1-2
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Dashboard and Interior Overview
Dashboard illumination ..................................................................................... page 5-34
TCS-OFF switch ................................................................................................ page 5-22
Headlight leveling switch .................................................................................. page 5-48
Lighting control/Turn signals ............................................................................ page 5-47
Audio control switch ......................................................................................... page 6-42
Instrument cluster .............................................................................................. page 5-31
Air bags ............................................................................................................. page 2-45
Wiper and washer lever ..................................................................................... page 5-50
Cruise control switches ...................................................................................... page 5-19
Information display ............................................................................................ page 6-49
Hazard warning flasher switch .......................................................................... page 5-53
Audio system ..................................................................................................... page 6-14
Glove box .......................................................................................................... page 6-54
Center console ................................................................................................... page 6-54
Accessory socket ............................................................................................... page 6-56
Cup holder ......................................................................................................... page 6-51
Parking brake ....................................................................................................... page 5-5
MT shift lever ...................................................................................................... page 5-9
AT shift lever (Sport AT) ................................................................................... page 5-12
Climate control system ........................................................................................ page 6-2
Ignition switch ..................................................................................................... page 5-2
Steering column release lever ............................................................................ page 3-38
Remote fuel-filler lid release ............................................................................. page 3-29
Trunk release button .......................................................................................... page 3-19
Hood release handle .......................................................................................... page 3-30
Storage pocket ................................................................................................... page 6-53
Outside mirror switch ........................................................................................ page 3-38
Interior light ....................................................................................................... page 6-46
Sunvisor ............................................................................................................. page 6-46
Map light ........................................................................................................... page 6-47
Rearview mirror ................................................................................................. page 3-39
Vanity mirror ...................................................................................................... page 6-46
Front seats ............................................................................................................ page 2-2
Seat belt ............................................................................................................. page 2-15
Rear seat .............................................................................................................. page 2-9
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-3
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
Sedan/5-Door
1-4
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
Trunk lid ............................................................................................................ page 3-19
Hatch ................................................................................................................. page 3-10
Antenna ............................................................................................................. page 6-14
Rear window defroster ....................................................................................... page 5-52
Power windows ................................................................................................. page 3-22
Tires ................................................................................................................... page 8-33
Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-38
Hood .................................................................................................................. page 3-30
Windshield wiper blades .................................................................................... page 8-28
Moonroof ........................................................................................................... page 3-32
Child safety locks .............................................................................................. page 3-10
Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... page 3-29
Doors and keys .................................................................................................... page 3-8
Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-38
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-5
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
Sport Wagon
1-6
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
Liftgate .............................................................................................................. page 3-13
Antenna ............................................................................................................. page 6-14
Rear window defroster ....................................................................................... page 5-52
Power windows ................................................................................................. page 3-22
Tires ................................................................................................................... page 8-33
Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-38
Hood .................................................................................................................. page 3-30
Windshield wiper blades .................................................................................... page 8-28
Moonroof ........................................................................................................... page 3-32
Child safety locks .............................................................................................. page 3-10
Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... page 3-29
Doors and keys .................................................................................................... page 3-8
Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-38
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-7
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
2
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint
systems and SRS air bags.
Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2
Front Seats (Manually Operated Seats) ..................................... 2-2
Front Seats (Electrically Operated Seats) .................................. 2-5
Rear Seat ................................................................................... 2-9
Seat Belt Systems ........................................................................ 2-15
Seat Belt Precautions .............................................................. 2-15
Seat Belt (Except Center-Rear Position) ................................. 2-19
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems ....... 2-21
Center-Rear Position Seat Belt ................................................ 2-23
Seat Belt Extender ................................................................... 2-26
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep ................................................ 2-28
Child Restraint ............................................................................ 2-29
Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-29
Installing Child-Restraint Systems .......................................... 2-33
LATCH Child-Restraint Systems ............................................ 2-40
SRS Air Bags ............................................................................... 2-45
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions ............... 2-45
Supplemental Restraint System Components ......................... 2-49
How the Air Bags Work .......................................................... 2-52
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Make sure the adjustable components
of a seat are locked in place:
Front Seats (Manually
Operated Seats)
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that
are not securely locked are
dangerous. In a sudden stop or
collision, the seat or seatback could
move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat
are locked in place by attempting to
slide the seat forward and backward
and rocking the seatback.
WARNING
Do not modify or replace the front
seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats
such as replacing the upholstery or
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The
front seats contain air bag
components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such
modifications could damage the
supplemental restraint system and
result in serious injury. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is
any need to remove or reinstall the
front seats.
qSeat Slide
WARNING
Adjust the driver seat only when the
vehicle is stopped:
Adjusting the driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous. The
driver could lose control of the vehicle
and have an accident.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is
dangerous. A collision, even one not
strong enough to inflate the air bags,
could damage the front seats which
contain essential air bag
To move a seat forward or backward, raise
the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position and release the lever.
components. If there was a
subsequent collision, an air bag may
not deploy which could lead to
injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,
front seat belt pretensioners and air
bags after a collision.
Make sure the lever returns to its original
position and the seat is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and
backward.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Do not drive with the seatback
unlocked:
The seatback plays an important role
qSeat Recline
WARNING
in your protection in a vehicle.
Leaving the seatback unlocked is
dangerous as it can allow passengers
to be ejected or thrown around and
baggage to strike occupants in a
sudden stop or collision, resulting in
severe injury. After adjusting the
seatback at any time, even when
there are no other passengers, rock
the seatback to make sure it is locked
in place.
Do not drive with the seats reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you don't get the full
protection from seat belts. During
sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and
suffer serious internal injuries. For
maximum protection, sit well back
and upright.
Always sit in a passenger seat properly
with the seatback upright and feet on
the floor:
To change the seatback angle, lean
forward slightly while raising the lever.
Then lean back to the desired position and
release the lever.
If your vehicle is equipped with front
passenger seat weight sensors,
sitting in the front passenger seat
improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous as it
can take off weight from the seat
bottom and affect the weight
determination of the front passenger
sensing system. As a result the front
passenger will not have the
supplementary protection of the air
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which
could cause result in serious injury.
Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
Make sure the lever returns to its original
position and the seatback is locked in
place by attempting to push it forward and
backward.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Height adjustment
CAUTION
When returning a rear-reclined
seatback to its upright position,
make sure you hold onto the
seatback with your other hand while
operating the lever. If the seatback is
not supported, it will flip forward
suddenly and could cause injury.
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-
catch release, then push the head restraint
down.
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)
By moving the seat lever up or down, the
seat bottom height can be adjusted.
Up
Adjust the head restraint so that the top is
even with the top of the passenger's ears,
never the passenger's neck to prevent
injury.
Down
qSeat Warmerí
The front seats are electrically heated. The
ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
qHead Restraint
WARNING
Press the switch to turn the seat warmer
on or off. When the switch is in the ON
position, the indicator light will come on.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly
adjusted:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
ON
OFF
2-4
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
Front Seats (Electrically
Operated Seats)
The seat temperature is regulated
automatically by a thermostat. Other than
turning it on or off, it cannot be adjusted.
WARNING
Do not modify or replace the front
seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats
such as replacing the upholstery or
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The
front seats contain air bag
components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such
modifications could damage the
supplemental restraint system and
result in serious injury. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is
any need to remove or reinstall the
front seats.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is
dangerous. A collision, even one not
strong enough to inflate the air bags,
could damage the front seats which
contain essential air bag
components. If there was a
subsequent collision, an air bag may
not deploy which could lead to
injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,
front seat belt pretensioners and air
bags after a collision.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
qSeat Recline (Driver's Seat)
CAUTION
Ø The seat-bottom power
adjustment is operated by motors.
Avoid extended operation because
excessive use can damage the
motors.
Ø To prevent the battery from
running down, avoid using the
power adjustment when the
engine is stopped. The adjuster
uses a large amount of electrical
power.
WARNING
Do not drive with the seats reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you don't get the full
protection from seat belts. During
sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and
suffer serious internal injuries. For
maximum protection, sit well back
and upright.
Ø Don't use the switch to make more
than one adjustment at a time.
Always sit in a front passenger seat
properly with the seatback upright and
feet on the floor:
qSeat Slide (Driver's Seat)
If your vehicle is equipped with front
passenger seat weight sensors,
sitting in the front passenger seat
improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous as it
can take off weight from the seat
bottom and affect the weight
To slide the seat, move the slide lifter
switch on the outside of the seat to the
front or back and hold it. Release the
switch at the desired position.
determination of the front passenger
sensing system. As a result the front
passenger will not have the
supplementary protection of the air
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which
could cause result in serious injury.
Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Change the seatback angle by pressing the
front or rear side of the reclining switch.
Release the switch at the desired position.
qLumbar Support Adjustment
(Driver's Seat)
The amount of lumber support can be
adjusted by rotating dial.
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)
The seat height can be adjusted by
moving the switch up or down.
qHead Restraint
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly
adjusted:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-
catch release, then push the head restraint
down.
NOTE
The seat temperature is regulated
automatically by a thermostat. Other than
turning it on or off, it cannot be adjusted.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top is
even with the top of the passenger's ears,
never the passenger's neck to prevent
injury.
qSeat Warmerí
The front seats are electrically heated. The
ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
Press the switch to turn the seat warmer
on or off. When the switch is in the ON
position, the indicator light will come on.
ON
OFF
2-8
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Never allow a passenger to sit or stand
on the folded seatback while the
vehicle is moving:
Rear Seat
WARNING
Do not stack cargo higher than the
seatbacks or place articles on the rear
package tray or on the luggage
compartment cover:
Driving with a passenger on the
folded seatback is dangerous.
Allowing a child to sit up on the
folded seatback while the vehicle is
moving is particularly dangerous. In
a sudden stop or even a minor
collision, a child not in a proper seat
or child-restraint system and seat
belt could be thrown forward, back
or even out of the vehicle resulting in
serious injuries or death. The child in
the baggage area could be thrown
into other occupants and cause
serious injury.
Stacking luggage or other cargo
higher than the seatbacks, and
placing articles on the rear package
tray or on the luggage compartment
cover is dangerous. During sudden
braking or a collision, objects can fly
around and become projectiles that
may hit and injure passengers.
Make sure luggage and cargo is
secured before driving:
Never give the car keys to children and
do not allow them to play in the
vehicle:
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
Playing with the folding rear seats is
dangerous. Once the seatbacks are
back up, a child in the trunk would
not be able to get out the way they
had entered. If you have small
children, keep the seatbacks locked
(sedan).
Make sure the adjustable components
of a seat are locked in place:
Adjustable seats that are not securely
locked are dangerous. In a sudden
stop or collision, the seat or seatback
could move, causing injury.
Always leave your car locked and keep
the car keys safely away from children:
Leaving your car unlocked or the
keys in reach of children is
Do not drive with the seatback
unlocked:
The seatback plays an important role
in your protection in a vehicle.
Leaving the seatback unlocked is
dangerous as it can allow passengers
to be ejected or thrown around and
baggage to strike occupants in a
sudden stop or collision, resulting in
severe injury. After returning the
seatback at any time, even when
there are no other passengers, rock
the seatback to make sure it is locked
in place.
dangerous. Children who find their
way into the trunk through an
unlocked rear seatback or an open
trunk can become accidentally locked
in the trunk. This could result in
death or brain damage from heat
prostration, particularly in the
summer. Always lock the doors and
the trunk, and as an added measure,
keep the rear seatbacks locked,
whether you have children in your
home or not.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
CAUTION
When returning a rear seat to its original
position, also replace the seat belt to its
normal position. Verify that the seat belt pulls
out and retracts.
Before folding the seatbacks with the
remote handle levers, make sure
there is no cup in a rear cup holder.
Folding the seatbacks with the
remote handle levers while a cup is in
the cup holder could soil or damage
the seat bottom and seatback.
q
Split-Folding Rear Seatback (Sedan)
The seatbacks can be folded down to
provide more space in the trunk.
To fold the seatbacks
CAUTION
Be careful of the following when
using the remote handle levers:
Ø On a downward slope, the
seatback could flip forward faster
than on a flat area.
Ø On an upward slope, the seatback
may not fold down. When the
seatbacks cannot be folded down
with levers, pull the rear seatback
forward from inside the vehicle.
WARNING
Always remove the child-restraint
system from the rear seat before
operating the remote handle levers for
the rear seat:
Operating the remote handle levers
while a rear-facing child-restraint
system is in the rear seat is
dangerous. It could cause injury to a
child seated in the child-restraint
system when the seatback suddenly
flips forward.
1. Unfasten the lap portion of the center-
rear seat belt (page 2-23).
Make sure there is nobody in the rear
seat area before operating the remote
handle levers:
CAUTION
Always unfasten the lap portion of
the belt before folding left-rear
seatback. Leaving the lap portion of
the belt fastened could cause
damage to the seat belt, buckle and
seatback.
Not checking the rear seat area for
persons before folding the seatbacks
with the remote handle levers is
dangerous. The rear seat area is
difficult to see from the rear of the
vehicle. Operating the remote handle
levers without checking could cause
injury to a person when a seatback
suddenly flips forward.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2. After checking that the rear seats are
clear, open the trunk and pull the
remote handle levers on the left and
right side of the trunk.
qEasy Fold Down Rear Seatbacks
and Forward Slide Seat Bottom
for Added Luggage Space (5-
Door/Sport Wagon)
The seatback can be folded down and the
seat bottom slid forward to provide a flat
surface extending from the back of the
front seats to the rear of the vehicle for
extra luggage space.
To return the seatbacks to the upright
position
1. Lift the seatbacks upright.
2. Pull on the top of the seatbacks from
inside the vehicle to make sure they are
locked.
3. Fasten the center-rear lap/shoulder belt
and check that all seat belts are routed
properly for passenger use (page 2-23).
WARNING
Always make sure the seat belts are
fully pulled out from under the
seatbacks:
A seat belt caught under a seatback
after the seatback is returned to its
upright position is dangerous. In a
collision or sudden stop, the seat belt
cannot provide adequate protection.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
To fold down the rear seatbacks and
slide forward seat bottoms
When using the remote handle levers:
CAUTION
WARNING
Be careful of the following when
using the remote handle levers:
Ø On a downward slope, the
seatback could flip forward faster
than on a flat area.
Ø On an upward slope, the seatback
may not fold down. When the
seatbacks cannot be folded down
with levers, pull the rear seatback
forward from inside the vehicle.
Always remove the child-restraint
system from the rear seat before
operating the remote handle levers for
the rear seat:
Operating the remote handle levers
while a rear-facing child-restraint
system is in the rear seat is
dangerous. It could cause injury to a
child seated in the child-restraint
system when the seatback suddenly
flips forward.
1. Unfasten the lap portion of the center-
rear seat belt (page 2-23).
Make sure there is nobody in the rear
seat area before operating the remote
handle levers:
CAUTION
Always unfasten the lap portion of
the belt before folding left-rear
seatback. Leaving the lap portion of
the belt fastened could cause
damage to the seat belt, buckle and
seatback.
Not checking the rear seat area for
persons before folding the seatbacks
with the remote handle levers is
dangerous. The rear seat area is
difficult to see from the rear of the
vehicle. Operating the remote handle
levers without checking could cause
injury to a person when a seatback
suddenly flips forward.
2. After checking that the rear seats are
clear, open the liftgate compartment
and pull the remote handle levers on
the left and right side of the liftgate
compartment.
CAUTION
Before folding the seatbacks with the
remote handle levers, make sure
there is no cup in a rear cup holder.
Folding the seatbacks with the
remote handle levers while a cup is in
the cup holder could soil or damage
the seat bottom and seatback.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
When using the rear seatback knobs:
2. Pull on the top of the seatbacks from
inside the vehicle to make sure they are
locked.
CAUTION
When operating the rear seatback
knob, make sure you support the
seatback with your hand. If the
seatback is not supported with your
hand, it will flip forward suddenly
and could cause injury to the finger
that pushes the rear seatback knob
down.
3. Fasten the center-rear lap/shoulder belt
and check that all seat belts are routed
properly for passenger use (page 2-23).
WARNING
Always make sure the seat belts are
fully pulled out from under the
seatbacks:
A seat belt caught under a seatback
after the seatback is returned to its
upright position is dangerous. In a
collision or sudden stop, the seat belt
cannot provide adequate protection.
1. Unfasten the lap portion of the center-
rear seat belt (page 2-23).
CAUTION
Always unfasten the lap portion of
the belt before folding the rear-left
seatback. Leaving the lap portion of
the belt fastened could cause
damage to the seat belt, buckle and
seatback.
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, make sure there is no
red indication:
A rear seatback not fully returned
and locked in the upright position is
dangerous. Sudden stops or
maneuvering could cause a seatback
to flip forward suddenly resulting in
injury. If the red indicator is visible on
the back of the rear seatback knob,
the seatback is not locked in the
upright position.
2. Support the seatback with your hand.
3. Push the rear seatback knob down.
Locked position
Unlocked position
To return the seatbacks to the upright
position
1. Lift the seatbacks upright.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
qHead Restraint (5-Door/Sport
qArmrest
Wagon)
The rear armrest in the center of the rear
seatback can be used (no occupant in the
center seat) or placed upright.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly
adjusted:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
Height adjustment
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-
catch release, then push the head restraint
down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top is
even with the top of the passenger's ears,
never the passenger's neck to prevent
injury.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way
when not in use.
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a
collision.
However, the front passenger's seat and all rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two
modes: emergency locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode.
While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front
passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make
sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
WARNING
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown
out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same
collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.
Do not wear twisted seat belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not
available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,
which could cause serious injury or death.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt
webbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate
protection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt
systems in use during an accident before they are used again.
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has
been expended:
One or both front air bags may deploy, and the corresponding pretensioner(s) may
also deploy at the same time. While it is safer to use a crash-used seat belt that was
used in an accident than no seat belt at all, using a seat belt with an expended
pretensioner or load limiter loaded reduces the safety available to you. Like the air
bags, the seat belt pretensioners will only function once. After they are expended,
they will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the seat belt
pretensioners are not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase. Always
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the seat belt pretensioners and air bags
after any collision. Expended seat belt pretensioners and air bags must be replaced
after any collision which caused them to deploy. Additionally, the load limiter will
only limit loads on the chest once in a collision and this is another reason to have the
front seat belts inspected.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
CAUTION
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep
them clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to “Cleaning the
Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing” (page 8-58).
qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOWAS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your
doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.
qEmergency Locking Mode
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision. When the seat belt is fastened, it will
always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic locking mode by
pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable
movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may be in the automatic locking
mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return to the belt to the more
comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe, level
area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it
around you again.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qAutomatic Locking Mode
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will
retract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child
restraint (page 2-29).
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt (Except Center-
Rear Position)
WARNING
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the
Seat Belt:
NOTE
Improper positioning of the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.
Always make sure the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is positioned
across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on
your neck, or on your upper arm.
When using the center-rear seat belt, refer to
“Center-Rear Position Seat Belt” (page 2-23).
qFastening the Seat Belts
1. Grasp the tongue.
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.
4. Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust
the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly
against your body.
Belt
Tongue
Take up slack
Keep low on
hip bone
Too high
3. Insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear a click.
WARNING
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat
Belt:
Tongue
The lap portion of the seat belt worn
too high is dangerous. In a collision,
this would concentrate the impact
force directly on the abdominal area,
causing serious injury. Wear the lap
portion of the belt snugly and as low
as possible.
Buckle
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qUnfastening the Seat Belts
qShoulder Belt Adjusterí
Depress the button on the buckle. If the
belt does not fully retract, pull it out and
check for kinks or twists. Then make sure
it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt if
the seat belt touches your neck, or if it
crosses your arm instead of your shoulder.
To raise the shoulder belt adjuster, push
the adjuster up. To lower the shoulder belt
adjuster, pull the button and slide it down.
Make sure the adjuster is locked.
Button
NOTE
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the
Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.
Always make sure the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is positioned
across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on
your neck, or on your upper arm.
2-20
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
and Load Limiting Systems
WARNING
Wear seat belts only as recommended
in this owner's manual:
For optimum protection, the driver and
front passenger seat belts are equipped
with pretensioner and load limiting
systems. For both these systems to work
properly you must wear the seat belt
properly.
Incorrect positioning of the driver and
front passenger seat belts is
dangerous. Without proper
positioning, the pretensioner and
load limiting systems cannot provide
adequate protection in an accident
and this could result in serious injury.
For more details about wearing seat
belts, refer to “Fastening the seat
belts” (page 2-19).
Pretensioners:
In moderate or severe frontal or near-
frontal accidents, the front air bag and
pretensioner systems deploy
simultaneously. The front seat belt
retractors remove slack quickly as the air
bags are expanding.
In addition, the pretensioner system for
the front passenger, like the front
passenger air bag, is designed to only
deploy in accordance with the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat. Any
time the air bags and seat belt
pretensioners have fired they must be
replaced. For details, refer to the front
passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-52).
Load limiter:
The load limiting system releases belt
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce
belt force on the occupant's chest. While
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has
an automatic mechanical function and can
activate in any accident mode with
sufficient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not fired,
the load limiting function must be
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Have your seat belts changed
immediately if the pretensioner or load
limiter has been expended:
Properly dispose of the pretensioner
system:
Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with non-
deactivated pretensioners is
One or both front air bags may
deploy, and the corresponding
pretensioner(s) may also deploy at
the same time. While it is safer to use
a crash-used seat belt that was used
in an accident than no seat belt at
all, using a seat belt with an
expended pretensioner or load limiter
loaded reduces the safety available to
you. Like the air bags, the seat belt
pretensioners will only function once.
After they are expended, they will not
function again and must be replaced
immediately. If the seat belt
pretensioners are not replaced, the
risk of injury in a collision will
increase. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer inspect the seat belt
pretensioners and air bags after any
collision. Expended seat belt
dangerous. Unless all safety
procedures are followed, injury could
result. Ask an Authorized Mazda
Dealer how to safely dispose of the
pretensioner system or how to scrap
a pretensioner-equipped vehicle.
NOTE
l
The pretensioner system will activate in a
moderate or greater frontal or near-frontal
collision. The pretensioner system for the
front passenger is designed to only deploy
in accordance with the total seated weight
on the front passenger seat. It will not
activate in most rollovers, side or rear
impacts.
l
Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be
released when the air bags and
pretensioners deploy. This does not indicate
a fire. This gas normally has no effect on
occupants, however, those with sensitive
skin may experience light skin irritation. If
residue from the deployment of the air bags
or the front pretensioner system gets on the
skin or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as
possible.
pretensioners and air bags must be
replaced after any collision which
caused them to deploy. Additionally,
the load limiter will only limit loads
on the chest once in a collision and
this is another reason to have the
front seat belts inspected.
Do not modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices
on the pretensioner system:
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices is
dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable
which would prevent it from
activating in an accident. The
occupants or repairers could be
seriously injured.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
Systems Warning Light
Center-Rear Position Seat
Belt
Before using the center-rear lap/shoulder
belt make sure tongue (A) and anchor
buckle (B) are fastened.
(A)
(B)
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner
system is working properly, the warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
qFastening the Seat Belt
1. Grasp the tongue (C).
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.
3. Insert the tongue (C) into the buckle
(D) until you hear a click.
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qUnfastening the Seat Belt
WARNING
Fastening the Center-Rear Seat Belt
with Only One Buckle:
Depress the button on the buckle. If the
belt does not fully retract, pull it out and
check for kinks or twists. Then make sure
it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Fastening the center-rear seat belt
with only one buckle is dangerous. If
only one pair of seat belt tongue and
buckle, either tongue (A) and anchor
buckle (B) or tongue (C) and anchor
buckle (D), is fastened, the seat belt
cannot provide full protection. In a
sudden stop or collision, the user
could slide under the belt and suffer
serious injuries. Always make sure
that both pairs of seat belt tongues
and buckles are fastened properly.
Button
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the
Seat Belt:
NOTE
Improper positioning of the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.
Always make sure the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is positioned
across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on
your neck, or on your upper arm.
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
qUnfastening the Lap Portion of
the Seat Belt
4. Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust
the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly
against your body.
Insert a small object such as a key in the
anchor buckle (B) slot.
(A)
(B)
WARNING
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat
Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn
too high is dangerous. In a collision,
this would concentrate the impact
force directly on the abdominal area,
causing serious injury. Wear the lap
portion of the belt snugly and as low
as possible.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Sedan (Behind head restraint on left
side)
CAUTION
Always unfasten the lap portion of
the belt before folding the left-rear
seatback. Leaving the lap portion of
the belt fastened could cause
damage to the seat belt, buckle and
seatback.
(A)
NOTE
To encourage rear seat passengers to wear
their seat belts, we suggest leaving the center-
rear lap position of the belt fastened at all
times except when folding the rear seat
forward.
(C)
5-Door (Left side of luggage
compartment)
qFastening the Lap Portion of the
Seat Belt
Grasp tongue (A) and insert it into the
anchor buckle (B) until you hear a click. It
is now secure for passenger use.
NOTE
After returning the left-rear seatback to its
upright position, fasten the lap portion of the
belt.
(A)
(C)
qStowing and pulling out the
Center-Rear Position Seat Belt
To pull out the seat belt, slide tongues
with your finger, and slowly pull out the
seat belt from the recess.
The center-rear position seat belt can be
stowed using the following procedure.
CAUTION
When stowing the seat belt, make
sure the belt is locked securely into
the recess. If the seat belt is not
properly stowed, it might get caught
in the seats and be damaged.
Sedan/5-Door
To stow the seat belt, retract the belt, put
tongues (A) and (C) together and insert
them into the recess.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Sport Wagon
Seat Belt Extender
To stow the seat belt, retract the belt, put
tongues (A) and (C) together and insert
them into the ceiling recess.
If your seat belt is not long enough, even
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
may be available to you at no charge from
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ceiling recess
This extender will be only for you and for
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold
in the critical moment of a crash.
(A)
When ordering an extender, only order
one that provides the necessary additional
length to fasten the seat belt properly.
Please contact your Authorized Mazda
Dealer for more information.
(C)
To pull out the seat belt, slide tongue (A)
with your finger while moving it
downward, and slowly pull out the seat
belt from the ceiling recess.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
NOTE
WARNING
Do not use a seat belt extender unless
it is necessary:
When not in use, remove the seat belt extender
and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt
extender is left connected, the seat belt
Using a seat belt extender when not
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt
will be too long and not fit properly.
In an accident, the seat belt will not
provide adequate protection and you
could be seriously injured. Only use
the extender when it is required to
fasten the seat belt properly.
extender might get damaged as it will not
retract with the rest of the seat belt and can
easily fall out of the door when not in use and
be damaged. In addition, the seat belt warning
light will not illuminate and function properly.
Do not use an improper extender:
Using a seat belt extender that is for
another person or a different vehicle
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and the user could be seriously
injured in an accident. Only use the
extender provided for you and for the
particular vehicle and seat. NEVER
use the extender in a different vehicle
or seat.
Do not use an extender that is too
long:
Using an extender that is too long is
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit
properly. In an accident, the seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and you could be seriously injured.
Do not use the extender or choose
one shorter in length if the distance
between the extender's buckle and
the center of the user's body is less
than 15cm (6 in).
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qBelt Minder
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep
The belt minder is a supplemental
warning to the seat belt warning function.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the warning light/beep
operates to give you further reminders
according to the chart below.
Vehicle speed
The seat belt warning light illuminates
and a beep sound will be heard if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
(0 ― 12 mph)
Seat belt
Indicator
Beep
Conditions of operation
Condition
Result
: Fastened
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
position.
for about 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is
fastened while the warning
light and the beep sound are
activated.
The warning light
turns off and the beep
sound stops.
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
The driver's seat belt is
The warning light will
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be
position.
heard.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Child Restraint Precautions
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to
the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the
child is seated on the center seat.
Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other
child-restraint systems.
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
front passenger seat weight sensors work as a part of the supplemental restraint system.
This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the front
passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the total seated weight on the front passenger
seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb).
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear
seats which are the best place for children.
For more details, refer to “Front passenger seat weight sensors” (page 2-52).
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Use the correct size child-restraint system:
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and
size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system
buckled down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-
restraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the
vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors
for LATCH child-restraint systems and the corresponding tether anchor.
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a
sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag
forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be
slammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous:
Vehicles equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors are also equipped with a
front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-37). Even with the front
passenger seat weight sensors, if you must use the front passenger seat for children,
seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under the
following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying
and could result in serious injury or death to the child.
Ø The total seated weight of the child with the child-restraint system on the front
passenger seat is approximately 30 kg (66 lb) or more with a child in the child-
restraint system.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.
Ø A rear passenger puts their feet on the front seat rails.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver
seat.
Ø Any accessories, which might increase the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat, are attached to the front passenger seat.
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Do not allow a child to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with side
and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of
the front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along
both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint
system is used. If the vehicle is equipped with side and curtain air bags, the impact of
inflation could cause serious injury or death to the child. Furthermore, leaning over
or against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the
advantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additional
side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better location
for children. Do not allow a child to lean over or against the side window, even if the
child is seated in a child-restraint system.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
Always remove the child-restraint system from the rear seat before operating the
remote handle levers for the rear seat:
Operating the remote handle levers while a rear-facing child-restraint system is in
the rear seat is dangerous. It could cause injury to a child seated in the child-
restraint system when the seatback suddenly flips forward.
CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during
warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your
child touches them.
NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH
child-restraint systems in the rear seat. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system,
refer to “LATCH Child-Restraint Systems” (page 2-40).
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
qRear Outboard Seat Child-
Restraint System Installation
Installing Child-Restraint
Systems
Follow these instructions when using a
child-restraint system, unless you are
attaching a LATCH-equipped child-
restraint system to the rear LATCH lower
anchors. Refer to “LATCH Child-
Restraint Systems” (page 2-40).
Accident statistics reveal that a child is
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's
seat is clearly the worst choice for any
child under 12, and with rear-facing child-
restraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to
air bags.
NOTE
Follow the child-restraint system
Some child-restraint systems now come
with tethers and therefore must be
installed on the seats that take tethers to
be effective. In your Mazda, tethered
child-restraint systems can only be
accommodated in the three positions on
the rear seat.
manufacturer's instructions carefully. If you
are not sure whether you have a LATCH
system or tether, check in the child-restraint
system manufacturer's instructions and follow
them accordingly. Depending on the type of
child-restraint system, it may not employ seat
belts which are in automatic locking mode.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with
front passenger seat weight sensors (page
2-52), which automatically deactivates the
front passenger air bag, a rear seat is the
safest place for a child of any age or size.
1. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
2. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions on
the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
Some child-restraint systems also employ
specially designed LATCH attachments;
refer to “LATCH Child-Restraint
Systems” (page 2-40).
3. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
WARNING
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:
Installation of a tether equipped
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat defeats the safety
design of the system and will result in
an increased chance of serious injury
if the child-restraint system goes
forward without benefit of being
tethered.
Place tether equipped child-restraint
systems where there are tether
anchors.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
retracts as snugly as possible. Clicking
from the retractor will be heard during
retraction if the system is in the
automatic locking mode. If the belt
does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat this step.
Anchor bracket location (Sedan)
Tether strap position (Sedan)
Tether
strap
NOTE
Inspect this function before each use of the
child-restraint system. You should not be able
to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor
while the system is in the automatic locking
mode. When you remove the child-restraint
system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return
the system to emergency locking mode before
occupants use the seat belts.
Anchor bracket
Anchor bracket location (5-Door/Sport
Wagon)
5. If your child-restraint system requires
the use of a tether strap, refer to the
manufacturer's instructions to hook and
tighten the tether strap after raising the
head restraint (5-Door/Sport Wagon).
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Tether strap position (5-Door/Sport
Wagon)
qCenter-Rear Seat Child-Restraint
System Installation
Route between head restraint upright.
Tether strap
1. Secure the child-restraint system with
the seat belt, according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Secure the tether strap according to the
child-restraint system manufacturer's
instruction.
Tether strap position (Sedan)
Tether
strap
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or
tether anchor and result in injury.
Anchor bracket
Tether strap position (5-Door)
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback (5-
Door/Sport Wagon):
Routing the tether strap on top of the
head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide
off the head restraint and loosen the
child-restraint system. The child-
restraint system could move which
may result in death or injury to the
child.
Anchor
Tether strap
bracket
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the child-
restraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Tether strap position (Sport Wagon)
qIf You Must Use the Front Seat
for Children
If you cannot put all children in the rear
seat, at least put the smallest children in
the rear and be sure the largest child up
front uses the shoulder belt over the
shoulder.
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat, even
with a seat weight sensor equipped
vehicle.
Anchor
bracket
Tether strap
This seat is also not set up for tethered
child-restraint systems, put them in one of
the rear seat positions set up with tether
anchors.
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint
system cannot be secured in the front
passenger's seat and should be used in the
rear seat.
Don't allow anyone to sleep against the
side window if you have an optional side
and curtain air bag, it could cause serious
injuries to an out of position occupant. As
children more often sleep in cars, it is
better to put them in the rear seat. If
installing the child-restraint system on the
front seat is unavoidable, follow these
instructions when using a front-facing
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Child-restraint system anchorages
are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly installed
child-restraint systems.Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the child-
restraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
NOTE
l
To check if your front seats have side air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bag
will have a “SRS AIRBAG” tag on the
outboard shoulder of the front seats.
l
To check if your vehicle has curtain air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain air
bag will have an “SRS AIRBAG” marking
on the window pillars along the roof edge.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Do not allow a child to lean over or
against the side window of a vehicle
with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to
lean over or against the side window,
the area of the front passenger seat,
the front and rear window pillars and
the roof edge along both sides from
which the side and curtain air bags
deploy, even if a child-restraint
WARNING
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible if installing a
front-facing child-restraint system on it
is unavoidable:
As your vehicle has front air bags
and doubly so if your vehicle has side
air bags, a front-facing child-
restraint system should be put on the
front passenger seat only when it is
unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back as
possible, because the force of a
deploying air bag could cause serious
injury or death to the child.
system is used. If the vehicle is
equipped with side and curtain air
bags, the impact of inflation could
cause serious injury or death to the
child. Furthermore, leaning over or
against the front door could block
the side and curtain air bags and
eliminate the advantages of
supplemental protection. With the
front air bag and the additional side
air bag that comes out of the front
seat, the rear seat is always a better
location for children. Do not allow a
child to lean over or against the side
window, even if the child is seated in
a child-restraint system.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat with an air bag
that could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems
on the front seat are particularly
dangerous.
Even in a moderate collision, the
child-restraint system can be hit by a
deploying air bag and moved
violently backward resulting in
serious injury or death to the child.
qFront Passenger's Seat Child-
Restraint System Installation
1. Slide the seat as far back as possible.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions on
the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
5. Make sure the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light illuminates
after installing a child-restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
Refer to Front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light on page
2-52.
3. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
retracts as snugly as possible. Clicking
from the retractor will be heard during
retraction if the system is in automatic
locking mode. If the belt does not lock
the seat down tight, repeat the previous
step and also this one.
NOTE
l
Inspect this function before each use of the
child-restraint system. You should not be
able to pull the shoulder belt out of the
retractor while the system is in the
automatic locking mode. When you remove
the child-restraint system, be sure the belt
fully retracts to return the system to
emergency locking mode before occupants
use the seat belts.
l
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may not employ seat belts which
are in automatic locking mode.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat if
the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not
illuminated:
While it is always better to install any
child-restraint system on the rear
seat, it is imperative that a child-
restraint system ONLY be used on the
front passenger seat if the
deactivation indicator light
illuminates when the child is seated
in the child-restraint system (page
2-52). Seating a child in a child-
restraint system installed on the front
passenger seat with the front
passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
dangerous. If this indicator light does
not illuminate even when the total
seated weight is less than
approximately 30 kg (66 lb), this
means that the front passenger front
and side air bags, and seat belt
pretensioner are ready for
deployment. If an accident were to
deploy an air bag, a child in a child-
restraint system sitting in the front
passenger seat could be seriously
injured or killed. If the indicator light
does not illuminate after seating a
child in a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, seat a child
in a child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
LATCH Child-Restraint Systems
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seat. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you
must use it to better assure your child's safety.
WARNING
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-
restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:
Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.
In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint
system attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the
seat position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is
occupied, use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the
seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in
an improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or
fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH
child-restraint systems.
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH child-
restraint system:
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and
the child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could
move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no
seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Anchor bracket location (Sedan)
qLATCH Child-Restraint System
Installation Procedure (Rear
Outboard Seats)
1. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
2. Expand the area between the seat
bottom and the seatback slightly to
verify the locations of the LATCH
lower anchors.
Tether strap position (Sedan)
Tether strap
NOTE
Anchor bracket
The markings above the LATCH lower anchors
indicate the locations of LATCH lower
anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint
system.
Anchor bracket location (5-Door/Sport
Wagon)
3. Secure the child-restraint system using
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instruction.
4. If your child-restraint system came
equipped with a tether, that probably
means it is very important to properly
secure the tether for child safety. Please
carefully follow the child-restraint
system manufacturer's instructions
when installing tethers.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Tether strap position (5-Door/Sport
Wagon)
qLATCH Child-Restraint System
Installation Procedure (Rear
Center Seat)
Route between head restraint upright.
Tether strap
The LATCH lower anchors at the center
of the rear seat are much further apart than
the sets of LATCH lower anchors for
child-restraint system installation at other
seating positions. Child-restraint systems
with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed on the center seating position.
Some LATCH equipped child-restraint
systems can be placed in the center
position and will reach the nearest
LATCH lower anchors which are 466 mm
(18.35 in) apart. LATCH compatible
child-restraint systems (with attachments
on belt webbing) can be used at this
seating position only if the child-restraint
system manufacturer's instructions state
that the child-restraint system can be
installed to LATCH lower anchors that are
466 mm (18.35 in) apart. Do not attach
two child-restraint systems to the same
LATCH lower anchor. If your child-
restraint system has a tether, it must also
be used for your child's optimum safety.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or
tether anchor and result in injury.
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback (5-
Door/Sport Wagon):
Routing the tether strap on top of the
head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide
off the head restraint and loosen the
child-restraint system. The child-
restraint system could move which
may result in death or injury to the
child.
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the child-
restraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
3. Secure the child-restraint system using
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or
tether anchor and result in injury.
4. If your child-restraint system came
equipped with a tether, that probably
means it is very important to properly
secure the tether for child safety. Please
carefully follow the child-restraint
system manufacturer's instructions
when installing tethers.
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the child-
restraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Anchor bracket location (Sedan)
1. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
2. Expand the area between the seat
bottom and the seatback slightly to
verify the locations of the LATCH
lower anchors.
Tether strap position (Sedan)
Tether strap
Anchor bracket
NOTE
The markings above the LATCH lower anchors
indicate the locations of LATCH lower
anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint
system.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Anchor bracket location and tether
strap position (5-Door)
Anchor
Tether strap
bracket
Anchor bracket location and tether
strap position (Sport Wagon)
Anchor
bracket
Tether strap
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 6 air bags. Please
verify which kinds of air bags are equipped on your vehicle by locating the “SRS
AIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators are visible in the area where the air bags
are installed.
The air bags are installed in the following locations:
l
The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)
The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)
l
l
l
These systems operate independently depending on the type of accident encountered; if
you have side and curtain air bags, the side and curtain air bags are not likely to deploy on
both sides in the same accident because a vehicle is not often hit from both sides. The side
and curtain air bags and the frontal air bag system will not normally deploy during the
same type of accident unless a combination of frontal and side impacts occur.
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection
only in the front seats in certain situations and the rear outside passenger positions only in
same-side collisions, so seat belts are always important in the following ways:
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
l
Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.
Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
l
inflation, such as roll-over or rear impact.
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal or side collisions that are not severe enough
l
to activate the air bags.
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
l
l
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
l
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint
system (page 2-29).
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the
installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
WARNING
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.
Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be
expected to inflate only in the first collision with frontal, near frontal or side forces
that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be
hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. Even if the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as possible. A sleeping child is more likely to lean against
the door and be hit by the side air bag in a moderate, right-side collision. Whenever
possible, always secure a child 12 years and under on the rear seat with an
appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and size.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands
or feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags
inflate with great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too
close. The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The
front seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should
adjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them is extremely
dangerous. The side air bags inflate with great force and speed directly out of the
outboard side of the front seat and expand along the front door on the side the car is
hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning
against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front seatbacks.
Furthermore, sleeping up against the door or hanging out the windows in the vehicle
could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of
supplemental protection. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting
in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air
bags deploy:
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere
with air bag inflation and injure the occupants.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:
Attaching things to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is
dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front
seats. Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules
in your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof
edge and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the
curtain air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the
roof edge, impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting
the air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open
releasing the gas.
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free
to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the
supplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front
seats.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated:
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could
get burned.
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,
bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The
air bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate
unexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.
Front occupants could be seriously injured.
Do not modify the suspension:
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the
suspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious
injuries.
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is
dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make
any modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim,
badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra
electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda
Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of front
seats. It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the
bags do not accidentally deploy, the driver seat slide position sensor and front
passenger seat weight sensors are not damaged and that the seats retain an
undamaged air bag connection.
NOTE
l
When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.
Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries
on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
l
Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that
familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System Components
The supplemental restraint systems (SRS) have two basic subsystems:
l
The air bag system with inflators and air bags.
The electrical system with crash sensors and diagnostic module.
l
The air bags are mounted in the following locations:
l
The steering wheel hub
The front passenger dashboard
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides
l
l
l
The air bags are out of sight until activated.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
qFront Air Bag System Components
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(6)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(8)
(6)
(7)
(1) Driver seat slide position sensor (page 2-52)
(2) Front seats
(3) Air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 2-60)
(4) Front dual stage inflators and air bags
(5) Front air bag sensor
(6) Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-52)
(7) Front seat belt pretensioner and load limiting systems (page 2-21)
(8) Front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-52)
(9) Front passenger seat weight sensor control module
(10) Crash sensors and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
(11) Driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches (page 2-52)
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
qSide and Curtain Air Bag System Components
(2)
(1)
Sedan/5-Door
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(1)
Sport Wagon
(3)
(4)
(1) Side and curtain inflators and air bags
(2) Front seats
(3) Crash sensors and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
(4) Side crash sensor
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
How the Air Bags Work
qHow the Front Air Bags Work
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, an
electrical current is sent to the inflators.
Gases are produced to inflate the front air bags and after the inflation, the front air bags
quickly deflate.
The front air bags will function only once. After that, the front air bags will not work
again and must be replaced.
Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can replace the system components.
The front, dual stage air bags control air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an
impact of moderate severity the front air bags deploy with lesser energy, whereas during
more severe impacts, they deploy with more energy. Deployment of the front air bags may
differ between the driver and the front passenger depending on the driver seat position,
front passenger weight and front seat belt usage, all of which provide data from each sensor
to the air bag system.
The front air bags will deploy only
in a frontal or frontal offset impact.
Driver seat slide position sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver seat slide position sensor as a part of the
supplemental restraint system. The sensor is located under the driver seat. The sensor
determines whether the driver seat is fore or aft of a reference position and sends the seat
position to the diagnostic module (SAS unit). The SAS unit is also designed to control the
deployment of the driver air bag depending on how close the driver seat is to the steering
wheel.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes if the sensor has a
possible malfunction (page 2-60).
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front passenger seat weight sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with the front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-37). These
sensors are located under both of the front passenger seat rails. These sensors determine the
total seated weight on the front passenger seat. The SAS unit is designed to prevent the
front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system from deploying if
the total seated weight is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb).
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt
pretensioner system when:
l
There is no passenger in the front passenger seat. (The front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not illuminate.)
The total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66
l
lb). (The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.)
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates
according to the following table.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible
malfunction. If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner system will not deploy.
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the front passenger front and side air
bags and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.
If the front passenger weight sensors are working properly, the indicator light illuminates
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. After a specified period of time it
goes out.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the following conditions:
Front passenger seat
belt pretensioner
system
Total seated weight on the Front passenger air bag Front passenger front and
front passenger seat
deactivation indicator light
side air bags
Deactivated
Deactivated
Empty (Not occupied)*
OFF
ON
Deactivated
Less than approx.30kg
(661b)
Deactivated
Approx.42 kg (931b) or
more
OFF
Ready
Ready
* If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates,
however this does not indicate a malfunction.
Curtain air bag is ready for inflating despite the chart above.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position and does not illuminate as indicated in the
above chart, do not allow a child to sit in the front passenger seat and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an
accident.
WARNING
Do not decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:
When an adult or large child sits on the front passenger seat, decreasing the total
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of
approximately 42 kg (93 lb) required for air bag deployment is dangerous. The front
passenger seat weight sensors will detect the reduced total seated weight condition
and the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system
will not deploy during an accident. The front passenger will not have the
supplementary protection of the air bag, which could result in serious injury.
Decreasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated
weight of approximately 42 kg (93 lb) could result in an air bag not deploying under
the following conditions, for example:
Ø A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with the feet.
Ø Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the
front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat
bottom.
Ø The front passenger seat occupant sits in a manner that does not place the entire
weight of the occupant on the seat such as by sitting too close to the door,
grasping the assist grip or the rim of the moonroof and sitting with the seatback
reclined too far.
Ø Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66
lb) and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lb).
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, increasing the total
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of
approximately 30 kg (66 lb) is dangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors
will detect the increased total seated weight, which could result in the unexpected
deployment of the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system in an accident and may cause serious injury. Increasing the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat beyond the total seated weight of approximately
30 kg (66 lb) could result in the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner system deployment in an accident under the following conditions, for
example:
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.
Ø A rear passenger steps on the front passenger seat rails with the feet.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver
seat.
Ø Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than
approximately 30 kg (66 lb) and they will reactivate when the weight exceeds
approximately 42 kg (93 lb).
CAUTION
Ø To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the
sensors in the front seat bottoms:
Ø
Do not place sharp objects on the front seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on
them.
Ø
Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.
Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:
Ø
Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint
system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page
2-37).
Ø
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
l
The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and
side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if luggage or
other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interior
changes suddenly.
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if the total
seated weight on the front passenger seat changes.
l
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate after installing a
child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Driver and front passenger buckle switches
The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts are
securely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.
qHow the Side and Curtain Air Bags Work
When air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, an
electrical current is sent to the inflators.
Gases are produced to inflate the side and curtain air bags and after the inflation, the side
and curtain air bags quickly deflate. However, the side air bag system for the front
passenger is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat.
The side and curtain air bags will function only once. After that, the side and curtain air
bags will not work again and must be replaced. Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can
replace the systems.
The side and curtain air bag will deploy only
on the side the vehicle receives the force of
the impact.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
qAir Bag Activation/Deactivation
NOTE
If the front passenger seat weight sensors detect a total seated weight on the front passenger seat is
less than approximately 42 kg (93 lb), the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner may not deploy (page 2-52), but the curtain air bags may deploy.
l
Front air bag activation
Frontal impact within about a 30
degree range from head-on to the
vehicle.
The front air bags will inflate if the
severity of impact is above the designed
threshold level.
l
Hitting a solid wall straight on at
greater than about 22 km/h (14 mph).
l
Driving into a big hole or hitting the far
side of a hole.
l
Hitting a curb, pavement edge or hard
object.
Limitations to front air bag activation
Depending on the severity of impact, the
front air bags may not inflate in the
following cases:
l
Landing hard or the vehicle falling.
l
Impacts involving trees or poles cause
severe cosmetic damage but may not
have enough stopping force to activate
the air bag.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
l
l
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
may not provide the stopping force
necessary for air bag deployment.
Vehicle roll-over, may deploy the side
and curtain air bags but not the front air
bags.
l
Rear-ending or running under a truck's
Side and curtain air bag activation
tail gate may not provide the stopping
force necessary for air bag deployment.
The severity of impact above the designed
threshold level to one side of the vehicle
(driver or passenger side areas) will cause
the side and curtain air bags on that side
to inflate, but it will not normally deploy
the front air bags.
Non-activation of front air bags
Front air bags will not normally inflate in
the following cases:
l
Collision from the rear.
Limitations to side and curtain air bag
activation
Depending on the severity of impact, the
side and curtain air bags may not inflate in
the following cases:
l
Frontal offset impact may not provide
enough side impact to deploy the side
and curtain air bags.
l
Impact to the side, but it may deploy
the side and curtain air bags.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
l
Side impacts involving trees or poles
can cause severe cosmetic damage but
may not have enough impact force to
activate the side and curtain air bags.
Non-activation of side and curtain air
bag
The side and curtain air bags will not
normally inflate in the following cases:
l
Collision from the rear.
l
Vehicle roll-over may not provide
enough side force to deploy the side
and curtain air bags.
l
Collision from the front, but it may
deploy the front air bags.
l
Side impacts with two-wheeled
qConstant Monitoring
vehicles may not provide enough force
to deploy the side and curtain air bags.
The following components of the air bag
systems are monitored by a diagnostic
system:
l
SAS unit
Front air bag sensor
Air bag modules
Side crash sensors
l
l
l
l
Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner
system warning light
Front seat belt pretensioners
Front passenger air bag deactivation
l
l
indicator light
Related wiring
Driver seat slide position sensor
Front passenger seat weight sensors
l
l
l
l
Driver and front passenger seat belt
buckle switches
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
The diagnostic module continuously
monitors the system's readiness. This
begins when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position and continues while
the vehicle is being driven.
qMaintenance
The air bag systems do not require regular
maintenance. But if any of the following
occurs, take your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible:
l
The air bag system warning light
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Light
flashes.
l
The air bag system warning light
remains illuminated.
The air bag system warning light does
l
not illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.
The air bags have deployed.
l
l
Front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or does not illuminate
as indicated in the chart. For more
details about this indicator light and
this chart, refer to “Front passenger
seat weight sensors” (page 2-52).
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner
system is working properly, the warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
WARNING
If it becomes necessary to have the components
or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a
person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, contact
an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged
air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
components:
Expended or damaged air bag/seat
belt pretensioner system components
must be replaced after any collision
which caused them to deploy or
damage them. Only a trained
“Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)” (page 9-2).
Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully
evaluate these systems to see that
they will work in any subsequent
accident. Driving with an expended
or damaged air bag or pretensioner
unit will not afford you the necessary
protection in the event of any
subsequent accident which could
result in serious injury or death.
Do not remove interior air bag parts:
Removing any components such as
the front seats, front dashboard, the
steering wheel or parts on the front
and rear window pillars and along
the roof edge, containing air bag
parts or sensors is dangerous. These
parts contain essential air bag
components. The air bag could
accidentally activate and cause
serious injuries. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer remove
these parts.
Dispose of the air bag properly:
Improper disposal of an air bag or a
vehicle with live air bags in it can be
extremely dangerous. Unless all
safety procedures are followed, injury
can result. Ask an Authorized Mazda
Dealer how to safely dispose of an air
bag or how to scrap an air bag
equipped vehicle.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
3
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment
of various parts.
Doors and Locks ........................................................................... 3-2
Keys .......................................................................................... 3-2
Keyless Entry System ............................................................... 3-3
Door Locks ............................................................................... 3-7
Hatch (5-Door) ........................................................................ 3-10
Liftgate (Sport Wagon) ........................................................... 3-13
Trunk Lid (Sedan) ................................................................... 3-19
Inside Trunk Release Lever (Sedan) ....................................... 3-21
Power Windows ...................................................................... 3-22
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ........................................................... 3-29
Hood ....................................................................................... 3-30
Moonroofí ............................................................................. 3-31
Security System ........................................................................... 3-33
Immobilizer System ................................................................ 3-33
Theft-Deterrent Systemí ........................................................ 3-35
Steering Wheel and Mirrors ...................................................... 3-38
Steering Wheel ........................................................................ 3-38
Mirrors .................................................................................... 3-38
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
A code number is stamped on the plate
attached to the key set; detach this plate
and store it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle) for use if you need to make a
replacement key.
Keys
WARNING
Do not leave the keys in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
NOTE
Write down the code number and keep it in a
separate safe and convenient place, but not in
the vehicle.
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have your code number
ready.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. These new kinds of keys are
fascinating to children. They could
play with power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehicle
move.
Key extend/retract method (Retractable
type key)
To extend the key, press the release
button.
NOTE
l
Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-33) for
information regarding keys and engine
starting.
l
(With theft-deterrent system)
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-35)
for information regarding keys and the
prevention of vehicle and vehicle contents
theft.
The keys operate all locks.
To retract the key, rotate it into the holder
while pressing the release button.
Retractable
type key
Key code number plate
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
l
Keyless Entry System
The keyless entry system is designed to
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due
to local conditions.
The system doesn't operate when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Doors and the hatch/liftgate can be locked
by pressing the lock button while any other
door or the hatch/liftgate/trunk lid is open.
However, the hazard warning lights will not
flash.
If the transmitter does not operate when
pressing a button or the operation range
becomes too small, the battery may be
dead. To install a new battery, refer to
Maintenance (page 3-5).
Additional transmitters can be obtained at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 3
transmitters can be used with the keyless
entry system per vehicle. Bring all
transmitters to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when additional transmitters are
required.
This system remotely locks and unlocks
the doors and the hatch/liftgate, and opens
the trunk lid, and opens the power
windows.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
l
l
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transmitter,
do not:
l
Ø Drop the transmitter.
Ø Get the transmitter wet.
Ø Disassemble the transmitter.
Ø Expose the transmitter to any kind
of magnetic field.
Ø Expose the transmitter to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
l
qTransmitter
Sedan
Lock button
Unlock button
Panic button
Operation
indicator light
Trunk button
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
5-Door/Sport Wagon
Lock button
To lock the doors and the hatch/liftgate,
press the lock button and the hazard
warning lights will flash once.
Lock button
Unlock button
To confirm that all doors and the hatch/
liftgate have been locked, press the lock
button again within 5 seconds. If they are
closed and locked, the horn will sound.
Operation
indicator light
NOTE
l
(Without theft-deterrent system)
Panic button
The hazard warning lights will flash once
to indicate that all doors and the hatch/
liftgate are locked.
NOTE
(U.S.A.)
l
l
(With theft-deterrent system)
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
l
The hazard warning lights will not flash.
The hazard warning lights only flash
l
when the theft deterrent system is armed
or turned off, refer to the theft-deterrent
system (page 3-35).
NOTE
l
(CANADA)
l
All doors and the hatch/liftgate cannot be
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
locked when the key is in the ignition
switch.
Confirm that all doors and the hatch/
liftgate are locked visually or audibly by
use of the double click.
l
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button and the hazard warning
lights will flash twice.
NOTE
The unlock button can be used to open the
power windows, but the lock button cannot be
used to close the power windows. Refer to
Opening/Closing the Power Windows from
Outside (page 3-27).
To unlock all doors and the hatch/liftgate,
press the unlock button again within 5
seconds.
The operation indicator light flashes when
the buttons are pressed.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qTransmitter Maintenance
(Without theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
indicate that all doors and the hatch/liftgate
are unlocked.
If the buttons on the transmitter are
inoperable and the operation indicator
light does not flash, the battery may be
dead.
Replace with a new battery before the
transmitter becomes unusable.
(With theft-deterrent system)
l
The hazard warning lights will not flash.
l
The hazard warning lights only flash when
the theft deterrent system is armed or
turned off, refer to the theft-deterrent
system (page 3-35).
CAUTION
Ø Install the battery with the positive
pole ( ) facing down. Battery
leakage could occur if it is not
installed correctly.
Ø When replacing the battery, be
careful not to bend the electrical
terminals or get oil on them. Also
be careful not to get dirt in the
transmitter as it could be
damaged.
Ø There is the danger of explosion if
the battery is not correctly
replaced.
Ø Replace only with the same type
battery (CR1620 or equivalent).
Ø Dispose of used batteries
according to the following
instructions.
NOTE
Auto re-lock function
After unlocking with the transmitter, all doors
and the hatch/liftgate will automatically lock if
one of the doors or the hatch/liftgate/trunk lid
is not opened within about 30 seconds.
Trunk button
To open the trunk, press and hold the
trunk button until the trunk lid opens.
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, pressing the panic button will
activate the vehicle's alarm.
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus
terminals of the battery using
cellophane or equivalent tape.
Never disassemble.
Never throw the battery into
fire and/or water.
Never deform or crush.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether any door
or the trunk lid is open or closed.
Ø
Ø
Turning on the alarm
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the
following will occur:
The horn sounds intermittently.
The hazard warning lights flash.
Ø
Replacing the transmitter battery
1. Unfold the key (page 3-2).
l
l
Turning off the alarm
Press any button on the transmitter.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot
and push the tab to remove the key
from the transmitter.
NOTE
If it is difficult to remove the battery by
pressing with a finger, use a small screwdriver
to press out the battery.
Tab
5. Put in the new battery (CR1620 or
equivalent) with the positive pole (
facing down.
)
3. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot
and gently pry open the transmitter.
6. Align the front and back covers and
snap the transmitter shut.
7. Install the key to the transmitter.
qService
If you have a problem with the keyless
entry system, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
4. Press the portion of the battery
indicated by A and remove the battery.
If your transmitter is lost or stolen, bring
all remaining transmitters to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make
the lost or stolen transmitter inoperative.
A
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
WARNING
Always take all children and pets with
you or leave a responsible person with
them:
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Leaving a child or a pet unattended
in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In
hot weather, temperatures inside a
vehicle can become high enough to
cause brain damage or even death.
Do not leave the keys in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. They could play with power
windows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move.
Keep all doors locked when driving:
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle
are dangerous. Passengers can fall
out if a door is accidentally opened
and can more easily be thrown out in
an accident.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Always close all the windows, lock the
doors and take the key with you when
leaving your vehicle unattended:
(Except sedan)
q
Locking, Unlocking with Transmitter
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-3).
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, which
could result in death. Also, a vehicle
left unlocked becomes an easy target
for thieves and intruders.
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-
Lock Knob
To lock any door from the inside, push the
door-lock knob.
To unlock, pull it out.
This does not operate the other door
locks.
(Sedan)
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, or
become trapped by climbing into the
trunk, which could result in death.
Also, a vehicle left unlocked becomes
an easy target for thieves and
intruders.
Lock
qLocking, Unlocking with Key
The driver's door can be locked/unlocked
with the key.
Unlock
Turn the key toward the front to unlock,
toward the back to lock.
To lock any door with the door-lock knob
from the outside, push the door-lock knob
to the lock position and close the door.
This does not operate the other door
locks.
Unlock
Door-lock knob
Lock
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
NOTE
l
Lockout prevention keeps you from locking
Holding the key in the unlocked position in the
driver's door lock for about a second unlocks
all doors and the hatch/liftgate. To unlock only
the driver's door, insert the key into the driver's
door lock and turn the key briefly to the unlock
position and then immediately return it to the
center position.
the driver's door with the key in the ignition
switch.
If you try to lock the driver's door when the
key is in the ignition switch and any door is
open, the door lock immediately unlocks.
When locking the doors this way, be careful
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
l
Locking, unlocking with door-lock
switch
qPower Door Locks
All doors and the hatch/liftgate lock
automatically when LOCK is pushed.
They all unlock when the unmarked part
of the door-lock switch is pushed.
Vehicle lock-out prevention
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
prevents you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle. With the key in the ignition
switch, all doors and the hatch/liftgate will
automatically unlock if they are locked
using the power door locks with any door
open.
Unlock
Lock
Locking, unlocking with key
All doors and the hatch/liftgate lock
automatically when the driver's door is
locked with the key. All doors and the
hatch/liftgate unlock when the driver's
door is unlocked and the key is held in the
unlock position for one second or longer.
Unlock
Lock
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qRear Door Child Safety Locks
Hatch (5-Door)
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
hatch area:
These locks are intended to help prevent
children from accidentally opening the
rear doors. Use them both whenever a
child rides in the vehicle.
Allowing a person to ride in the hatch
area is dangerous. The person in the
hatch area could be seriously injured
or killed during sudden braking or a
collision.
If you slide the child safety lock to the
lock position before closing that door, the
door cannot be opened from the inside.
The door can be opened only by pulling
the outside handle.
Keep the hatch closed when driving:
Exhaust gas entering the cabin of a
vehicle through an open hatch is
dangerous. This gas contains CO
(carbon monoxide), which is
Lock
colorless, odorless, and highly
poisonous. If inhaled, it can cause
loss of consciousness and death.
Unlock
qLocking, Unlocking with Key
The hatch can be locked/unlocked by
inserting the key into the driver's door key
slot, refer to Power Door Locks (page
3-9).
q
Locking, Unlocking with Transmitter
The hatch can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-3).
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-
Lock Switch
The hatch can be locked/unlocked by
operating the door-lock switch, refer to
Power Door Locks (page 3-9).
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qOpening and Closing the Hatch
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a
malfunction in the electrical system and the
hatch cannot be unlocked, perform the
following manual procedure as an emergency
measure to unlock it:
To open the hatch, pull up on the handle.
1. Remove the cap on the interior surface of
the hatch with a flathead screwdriver.
Cap
2. Turn the lever to the right to unlock the
hatch.
Lever
After performing this emergency measure,
have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
To close, use both hands to push the hatch
down until the lock snaps shut. Do not
slam it. Pull up on the hatch to make sure
it is secure.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
This cover can be removed for more
room. To do this, just unfasten the straps;
then lift and pull it out.
qLuggage Strap
The luggage compartment can be
accessed by opening the hatch when the
straps are attached to the sides of the
hatch.
Strap
qLuggage Compartment Cover
WARNING
Don't place anything on top of the
cover:
Placing luggage or other cargo on
top of the luggage compartment
cover is dangerous. During sudden
braking or a collision, the cargo
could become a projectile that could
hit and injure someone.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-
Lock Switch
Liftgate (Sport Wagon)
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
luggage compartment:
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by
operating the door-lock switch, refer to
Power Door Locks (page 3-9).
Allowing a person to ride in the
luggage compartment is dangerous.
The person in the luggage
compartment could be seriously
injured or killed during sudden
braking or a collision.
qOpening and Closing the Liftgate
Opening the liftgate
Pull up on the handle.
Do not drive with the liftgate open:
Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle
is dangerous. An open liftgate in a
moving vehicle will cause exhaust
gas to be drawn into the cabin. This
gas contains CO (carbon monoxide),
which is colorless, odorless, and
highly poisonous, and it can cause
loss of consciousness and death.
Moreover, an open liftgate could
cause occupants to fall out in an
accident.
qLocking, Unlocking with Key
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by
inserting the key into the driver's door key
slot, refer to Power Door Locks (page
3-9).
q
Locking, Unlocking with Transmitter
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-3).
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qLuggage Compartment Cover
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a
malfunction in the electrical system and the
liftgate cannot be unlocked, perform the
following procedure as an emergency measure
to unlock it:
Use the luggage compartment cover to
conceal cargo or luggage.
WARNING
Do not place anything on top of the
luggage compartment cover:
Placing luggage or other cargo on
top of the luggage compartment
cover is dangerous. During sudden
braking or a collision, the cargo
could become a projectile that could
hit and injure someone.
1. Remove the cap on the interior surface of
the liftgate with a flathead screwdriver.
Cap
CAUTION
Make sure the luggage compartment
cover is firmly secured. If it is not
firmly secured, it could unexpectedly
disengage resulting in injury.
2. Turn the lever to the right to unlock the
liftgate.
Installing the cover
1. Set the left end of the retainer bar into
the notch on the left side of the luggage
compartment.
Lever
After performing this emergency measure,
have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Notch
Closing the liftgate
Use both hands to push the liftgate down
until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.
Pull up on the liftgate to make sure it is
securely latched.
Retainer bar
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
2. Set the right side of the retainer bar
onto the retainer loop on the right side
of the luggage compartment.
NOTE
To fully retract and protect the cover, guide the
cover all the way into the retainer.
Tab
Retainer
loop
3. Slowly pull out the cover towards you
and insert the cover ends into the hook
retainers at the rear of the vehicle.
2. Press and hold the button on the right
side of the retainer bar and lift the bar.
Button
Hook
retainer
3. Remove the left end of the retainer bar
from the notch.
Removing the cover
1. Remove the cover ends from the hook
retainers and slowly roll up the cover.
qLuggage Compartment Net
The luggage compartment net can be used
as a compartment separator or to keep
animals in the back.
CAUTION
Make sure the net is firmly secured. If
it is not firmly secured, it could
unexpectedly disengage resulting in
injury.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Dividing the luggage compartment
from the rear seat
The width of the net anchors can be shortened
by pushing both sides inward.
WARNING
Do not use the luggage compartment
net to secure objects in the luggage
compartment or the rear seat area:
Using the luggage compartment net
to secure objects in the luggage
compartment or the rear seat area is
dangerous. The luggage
Net anchor
compartment net is not designed to
hold objects in place that could fly
forward in a frontal collision.
Unsecured objects that are thrown
around the inside of the vehicle could
cause injury to occupants. This is
particularly true for objects stacked
above the seatback level. Never stack
objects above the seatback level. If
the luggage compartment is divided
from the rear seat, pull the luggage
compartment cover over the cargo in
the luggage compartment.
Make sure luggage and cargo is
secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
To install the net:
1. Install the retainer bar in the luggage
compartment.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
2. Slowly pull out the net in the upward
direction, insert the left and right net
anchors into the ceiling retainers, and
slide them to the position indicated in
the figure.
Dividing the luggage compartment
from the front seats
WARNING
Do not use the luggage compartment
net to secure objects in the luggage
compartment or the rear seat area:
Using the luggage compartment net
to secure objects in the luggage
compartment or the rear seat area is
dangerous. The luggage
compartment net is not designed to
hold objects in place that could fly
forward in a frontal collision.
Net
Net
anchor
Unsecured objects that are thrown
around the inside of the vehicle could
cause injury to occupants. This is
particularly true for objects stacked
above the seatback level. Never stack
objects above the seatback level. If
the luggage compartment is divided
from the rear seat, pull the luggage
compartment cover over the cargo in
the luggage compartment.
To remove the net:
1. Lift the net slightly and disengage the
anchors from the ceiling retainers.
2. Slowly lower and support the net as it
rolls up into the retainer bar.
CAUTION
Make sure luggage and cargo is
secured before driving:
When disengaging the net anchors,
hold the top of the net firmly in your
hand. If you lose control of the net, it
will automatically roll up in an
uncontrolled manner and could
cause injury.
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
CAUTION
Moving the rear seatbacks with the
retainer bar mounted could scratch
the interior of the vehicle. The
retainer bar must be removed from
the back of the seatbacks before
raising the seatbacks.
To install the net:
1. Fold down the rear seatback (page
2-11).
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
2. Remove the retainer bar from the rear
seatback position.
5. Slowly pull out the net in the upward
direction, insert the left and right net
anchors into the ceiling retainers, and
slide them to the position indicated in
the figure.
3. Insert the retainer bar anchors into the
left side of each rear seatback retainer
(back of the seatback).
Retainer bar
Net
anchor
Rear seat
Net
Retainer
To remove the net:
4. Slide the retainer bar in the direction
indicated in the figure, and engage the
anchors into the seatback retainers.
1. Lift the net slightly and disengage the
net anchors from the ceiling retainers.
2. Slowly lower and support the net as it
rolls up into the retainer bar.
Retainer bar
3. Remove the retainer bar in the reverse
order of installation.
CAUTION
When disengaging the net anchors,
hold the top of the net firmly in your
hand. If you lose control of the net, it
will automatically roll up in an
uncontrolled manner and could
cause injury.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
q
Opening and Closing the Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid (Sedan)
WARNING
Close the trunk lid, lock the rear
seatbacks and do not allow children to
play inside the vehicle:
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
trunk:
Allowing a person to ride in the trunk
is dangerous. In addition, the person
in the trunk could be seriously
injured or killed during sudden
braking or a collision.
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in
possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
Keep the trunk closed when driving:
Exhaust gas entering the cabin of a
vehicle through an open trunk is
dangerous. This gas contains CO
(carbon monoxide), which is
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by locking rear
seats, doors and the trunk, and
keeping the keys where children can
not play with them:
colorless, odorless, and highly
poisonous. If inhaled, it can cause
loss of consciousness and death.
Leaving children or animals
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars
or trunks can die very quickly from
heat prostration. Do not leave your
children or pets alone in a car at any
time. Do not leave the car, the rear
folding seats or the trunk unlocked.
CAUTION
For vehicles equipped with a rear
spoiler, do not lift the trunk lid by the
spoiler. Lifting up the trunk lid by the
rear spoiler could cause damage to
the rear spoiler and the trunk lid.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Opening the trunk lid with the key
qTrunk Light
Insert the key into the slot and turn it
clockwise.
The trunk light is on when the lid is open
and off when it's closed.
Open
Opening the trunk lid with the
transmitter
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the trunk open for a long period
when the engine is not running.
The trunk lid can be opened by operating
the keyless entry system transmitter, refer
to Keyless Entry System (page 3-3).
Opening the trunk lid with the remote
release button
Push the release button.
Closing the trunk lid
Use both hands to push the trunk lid down
until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.
Pull up on the trunk lid to make sure it is
secure.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Inside Trunk Release
Lever (Sedan)
WARNING
Close the trunk lid, lock the rear
seatbacks and do not allow children to
play inside the vehicle:
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside
trunk release handle that provides a means
of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the
trunk.
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in
possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
No matter how careful adults might be
with keys and locking their cars, parents
should be aware that children may be
tempted to play around vehicles and use
the trunk as a hiding place.
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by locking rear
seats, doors and the trunk, and
keeping the keys where children can
not play with them:
Adults are advised to familiarize
Leaving children or animals
themselves with the operation and
location of the inside release handle so
that all children can be told about it in an
appropriate way, keeping in mind that
most vehicles don't have such handles.
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars
or trunks can die very quickly from
heat prostration. Do not leave your
children or pets alone in a car at any
time. Do not leave the car, the rear
folding seats or the trunk unlocked.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qOpening the Trunk Lid from the
Inside
Power Windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for the power windows to
operate.
Slide the inside trunk release lever in the
direction of the arrow. The lever is made
of material that will glow for hours in the
darkness of the trunk following a brief
exposure to ambient light.
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
The inside trunk release lever is located
on the inside of the trunk lid.
Closing power windows are
dangerous. A person's hands, head,
or even neck could be caught by the
window and result in serious injury
or even death.
This warning applies especially to
children.
Always lock all passenger power
windows with the power window lock
switch on the driver's side while
children are in the vehicle, and never
allow children to play with power
window switches:
Leaving the power window switches
unlocked while children are in the
vehicle is dangerous. Power window
switches that are not locked with the
power window lock switch would
allow children to operate power
windows unintentionally which could
result in serious injury if a child's
hands, head or neck becomes caught
by the window.
CAUTION
To prevent burning out the fuse and
damaging the power window system,
do not open or close more than three
windows at once.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Manual opening/closing
q
Operating the Front Power Windows
To open a power window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the power window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
NOTE
l
Each passenger power window can be
operated with each door switch when the
power window lock switch on the driver's
door is in the unlocked position (page
3-26).
Master control switches
Close
l
Each passenger power window can also be
operated by the power window master
control switches on the driver's door.
Driver's
Open
window
Master control switches
Driver's window
Left rear window
Front passenger's
window
Front passenger switch
Front passenger's
window
Close
Open
Right rear window
l
The following functions can be performed
for the front power windows using the
power window master control switches on
the driver's door or front passenger's door
switch.
Manual opening/closing
Auto-opening/closing
Two-step down function
l
l
Auto-opening/closing
l
To fully open a power window
automatically, press the switch completely
down.
To fully close the power window
automatically, pull the switch completely
up.
To stop the power window partway, pull
or press the switch in the opposite
direction and then release it.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Canceling the two-step down function
(POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION
PROCEDURE)
To cancel the two-step down function for
the front power windows, carry out the
following procedure using the master
control switches.
If the battery was disconnected during vehicle
maintenance, or for other reasons such as a
switch continues to be operated after the
window is fully open/close, the power windows
will not fully open and close automatically. Re-
initialization of the automatic function can be
performed using the master control switches
and the front passenger door switch. Carry out
the following procedure to resume operation:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and complete the following
procedure within 5 seconds:
Press the power window switch 2 times
firmly, then pull it 2 times firmly.
Master control switches
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Driver's
window
2. Make sure that the power window lock
switch located on the driver's door is not
depressed.
3. Press the switch and fully open the power
window.
4. Pull up the switch to fully close the power
window and continue holding the switch for
about 2 seconds after the window fully
closed.
Front passenger's
window
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
5. Repeat Steps 3-4 for each front power
window.
3. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, and within 40 seconds, turn
the ignition switch to the ON position
and complete the following procedure
within 5 seconds:
6. Make sure that the power windows operate
correctly using the door switches.
Two-step down function
Press the power window switch 2 times
firmly, then pull 2 times firmly.
With the power window completely
closed, press the switch lightly and it will
open and stop about 3 cm (1 in) from the
top.
If you continue to press and hold the
switch, the window will resume opening
all the way.
NOTE
Pressing the power window switch once when
the window is fully closed will only open it
about 3 cm (1 in) to allow convenient
ventilation of the cabin.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
NOTE
l
l
The two-step down function cannot be
Depending on driving conditions, a closing
power window could stop and start opening
when the window feels a shock that is
similar to something blocking it.
In the event the jam-safe function activates
and the power window cannot be closed
automatically, pull and hold the switch fully
and the window will close.
canceled if the procedure is not completed
within the specified times, or the procedure
is changed along the way. To redo the
procedure, first turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position and proceed from the
beginning.
If you are unable to cancel the function
despite carrying out the cancellation
procedure, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
l
l
The jam-safe window function does not
operate until the system is re-initialized.
Engine-off power window operation
Restoring the two-step down function
The power window can be operated for
about 40 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned from the ON position to the
ACC or LOCK position with all doors
closed. If either front door is opened, the
power window will be inoperable.
With the two-step down function in the
canceled state, repeat the previous
procedure for canceling the function on
each door switch and it will be restored.
NOTE
If you are unable to restore the function despite
doing the restore procedure, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l
For engine-off operation of the power
window, the switch must be held up firmly
throughout window closure because the
auto-closing function will be inoperable.
Jam-safe window
l
The two-step down function is inoperable
during engine-off operation.
If a person's hands, head or an object
blocks the window during the manual
closing operation or the auto-closing
operation, the window will stop and open
halfway.
WARNING
Make sure nothing blocks the window
just before it reaches the fully closed
position or while fully holding up the
power window switch:
Blocking the power window just
before it reaches the fully closed
position or while fully holding up the
power window switch is dangerous.
In this case, the jam-safe function
cannot prevent the window from
stopping. If fingers are caught,
serious injuries could occur.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Engine-off power window operation
q
Operating the Rear Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for
about 40 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned from the ON position to the
ACC or LOCK position with all doors
closed. If either front door is opened, the
power windows will be inoperable.
The power windows may be operated
when the power window lock switch on
the driver's door is in the unlocked
position.
The rear power windows may be opened
or closed using the power window master
control switches on the driver's door.
qPower Window Lock Switch
With the lock switch in the unlocked
position, all power windows on each door
can be operated.
Left rear window
With the lock switch in the locked
position, only the driver's side power
window can be operated.
Locked position
Right rear window
Power window lock switch
To open the power window to the desired
position, hold down the switch.
To close the power window to the desired
position, pull up the switch.
Unlocked position
Close
Open
WARNING
Unless a passenger needs to operate a
power window, keep the power window
lock switch in the locked position:
Unintentional power window
operation is dangerous. A person's
hands, head, or neck could be caught
by the window and result in serious
injury.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
WARNING
Use the auto-window function only
when you can see the vehicle and it is
in a secure area:
When the power window lock switch is in the
locked position, the light on front passenger's
power window switch turns off. The light may
be difficult to see depending on the
surrounding brightness.
Do not let children play with your
keys. If they open the window
without your knowing, the open
windows are an even bigger
invitation to a thief than leaving the
doors unlocked.
qOpening/Closing the Power
Windows from Outside
The front power windows can be opened
or closed from outside the vehicle after
the doors and the hatch/liftgate/trunk lid
are closed.
The front power windows may be
operated when the power window lock
switch on the driver's door is in the lock
or unlocked position.
The windows can be opened for
ventilating the cabin before getting in the
vehicle.
With unlock button (Keyless entry
system)
Press once, then press again within 1.5
seconds and hold.
After the doors and the hatch/liftgate/
trunk lid are unlocked, the two front
windows open while the unlock button is
pressed.
To stop the windows while opening,
release the button.
If the operation is performed from the
beginning again, the windows open.
Sedan
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
Closing power windows are
dangerous. A person's hands, head,
or even neck could be caught by the
window and result in serious injury
or even death.
This warning applies especially to
children.
NOTE
Lock button
Unlock button
Panic button
The power windows cannot be opened or
closed from outside the vehicle under the
following condition:
l
A door or the hatch/liftgate/trunk lid is
opened.
l
The key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Opening
Trunk button
Because nobody likes getting into a very
hot car, Mazda has introduced a way to
open the two front windows as you
approach the vehicle to get the air moving
before you get in.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
5-Door/Sport Wagon
NOTE
The window opening operation also can be
stopped by turning the key toward the back.
However, the doors and the hatch/liftgate/trunk
lid will lock.
Lock button
Unlock button
Closing
The windows can be closed in case they
are left open after getting out of the
vehicle.
With key
Panic button
1. Insert the key in the driver's door key
cylinder.
NOTE
l
The unlock button does not operate unless
it is pressed twice sequentially.
The lock button cannot be used to close the
power windows.
2. Turn the key toward the back and hold
it. After the doors and the hatch/
liftgate/trunk lid are locked, the
windows close as long as the key is
turned.
l
With key
1. Insert the key in the driver's door key
cylinder.
2. Turn the key toward the front and hold
it. After the doors and the hatch/
liftgate/trunk lid are unlocked, the
windows fully open automatically.
Close
Open
To stop this operation, turn the key to the
center position, then turn it toward the
front again.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qFuel-Filler Lid
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap
To open, pull up the remote fuel-filler lid
release.
WARNING
When removing the fuel cap, loosen the
cap slightly and wait for any hissing to
stop. Then remove it:
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
if ingested. Fuel spray is released
when there is pressure in the fuel
tank and the fuel cap is removed too
quickly.
Remote fuel-filler
lid release
Before refueling, stop the engine, and
always keep sparks and flames away
from the filler neck:
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or flames causing
serious burns and injuries.
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuel
filler cap or not using a fuel filler cap
may result in fuel leak, which could
result in serious burns or death in an
accident.
qFuel-Filler Cap
To remove the filler cap, turn it
counterclockwise.
To close the filler cap, turn it clockwise
until two or more clicks are heard.
CAUTION
Close
Always use only a genuine Mazda
fuel cap or an approved equivalent,
available at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer. The wrong cap can result in a
serious malfunction of the fuel and
emission control systems. It may also
cause the check engine light in the
instrument cluster to illuminate.
Open
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is closed
and securely locked:
CAUTION
Make sure the fuel-filler cap is
tightened securely. The check engine
light may illuminate when the cap
isn't tightened securely. If the light
remains on (even after you have
tightened the cap securely, driven,
and restarted the engine several
times), it may indicate a different
problem. Contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
A hood that is not closed and
securely locked is dangerous as it
could fly open while the vehicle is
moving and block the driver's vision
which could result in a serious
accident.
qOpening the Hood
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the hood.
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening
and slide the hood latch lever to the
right and lift the hood.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
3. Grasp the support rod and secure it in
the stay hole indicated by the arrow to
hold the hood open.
Moonroofí
The moonroof can be opened or closed
electrically only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Slide switch
Support rod
Clip
Tilt switch
qClosing the Hood
1. Check under the hood area to make
certain all filler caps are in place and
all loose items (e.g. tools, oil
WARNING
Do not let passengers stand up or
extend part of the body through the
open moonroof while the vehicle is
moving:
containers, etc.) have been removed.
2. Insert the support rod in its clip while
holding up the hood. Verify that the
support rod is secured in the clip before
closing the hood.
Extending the head, arms, or other
parts of the body through the
moonroof is dangerous. The head or
arms could hit something while the
vehicle is moving. This could cause
serious injury or death.
3. Close the hood so that it locks securely.
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing the moonroof:
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The
hands, head, or even neck of a
person ―especially a child― could
be caught in it as it closes, causing
serious injury or even death.
NOTE
After washing your Mazda or after it rains,
wipe the water off the moonroof before
operating it to avoid water penetration which
could cause rust and water damage to your
headliner.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-31
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qTilt Operation
qSunshade
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted
open to provide more ventilation.
The sunshade can be opened and closed
by hand.
To tilt, push the rear of the tilt switch.
To close, push the front of the tilt switch.
The sunshade opens automatically when
the moonroof is opened, but must be
closed by hand.
Sunshade
Tilt up
Close
CAUTION
qSlide Operation
The sunshade does not tilt. To avoid
damaging the sunshade, do not push
up on it.
To open to any position, press the rear of
the slide switch.
To close, press the front of the slide
switch.
Open
Close
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
Immobilizer System
CAUTION
When starting the engine do not
allow the following, as the engine
may not start due to the electronic
signal from the ignition key not being
transmitted correctly.
The immobilizer system allows the engine
to start only with a key the system
recognizes.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized key, the engine will
not start, thereby helping to prevent the
theft of your vehicle.
Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.
CAUTION
Ø Radio equipment like this is
governed by laws in the United
States.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do
not:
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal
objects touch the key grip.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.
Get the key wet.
Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
Ø Spare keys or keys for other
vehicles equipped with an
immobilizer system touch or come
near the key grip.
Ø
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage touch or come
near the key.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
(U.S.A.)
If the engine doesn't start with the correct
ignition key, and the security indicator
light keeps illuminating or flashing, the
system may have a malfunction. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE
l
If the security indicator light comes on and
stays on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, the engine will not start.
l
(CANADA)
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
a transceiver or a mobile telephone, could
interfere with your immobilizer system. If
you are using the proper key and your
engine fails to start, check the security
indicator light. If it is flashing, remove the
ignition key and wait 2 seconds or more,
then reinsert it and try starting the engine
again. If it doesn't start after 3 or more
tries, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qOperation
l
If the security indicator light flashes
Arming
continuously while you are driving, don't
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If you
shut off the engine while the light is
flashing you won't be able to restart it.
Since the electronic codes are reset when
repairing the immobilizer system, the keys
are needed. Bring all the existing keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The system is armed when the ignition
switch is turned from the ON to the ACC
position.
The security indicator light in the
instrument panel flashes every 2 seconds
until the system is disarmed.
l
Disarming
The system is disarmed when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the correct ignition key.
The security indicator light illuminates for
about 3 seconds and goes out.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
qMaintenance
Theft-Deterrent Systemí
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the theft deterrent system detects an
inappropriate entry into the vehicle, which
could result in the vehicle or its contents
being stolen, the alarm alerts the
surrounding area of an abnormality by
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard
warning lights.
NOTE
l
The keys carry a unique electronic code.
For this reason, and to assure your safety,
obtaining replacement key requires some
waiting time. They are only available
through an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Refer to Operation on page 3-35.
NOTE
l
Always keep a spare key, in case one is lost.
l
The theft-deterrent system operates with the
key or the keyless entry system transmitter.
The system will not function unless it is
properly armed. To properly secure the
vehicle, always make sure all windows are
completely closed and all doors and the
trunk lid/liftgate/hatch are locked before
leaving the vehicle. Remember to take your
key and transmitter.
If a key is lost, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
l
l
If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of
your remaining keys and immobilizer
system. Bring all the remaining keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not
been reset is not possible.
qOperation
qModification and Add-On
Equipment
System triggering conditions
The horn sounds intermittently and the
hazard warning lights flash for about 25
seconds when the system is triggered by
any one of the following:
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
system's operation if the system has been
modified or if any add-on equipment has
been installed to it.
l
Forcing open a door, the hood or the
trunk lid/liftgate/hatch.
Unlocking a door with the inside door-
lock knob.
Unlocking a door with the door lock
CAUTION
l
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
system or the vehicle.
l
switch.
l
Opening a door by operating an inside
door-lock knob.
Opening the hood by operating the
l
hood release handle.
Opening the trunk lid by operating the
l
trunk lid release button.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-35
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
l
If the system is triggered again, the lights
and horn will activate until a door is
unlocked or the trunk lid is opened with
the key or with the transmitter.
Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the ON position.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice
to indicate that the system is turned off.
qHow to Arm the System
NOTE
The trunk lid can be opened with the key or the
transmitter even when the system is armed. The
alarm will not come on and the system will
remain armed.
1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
2. Make sure the hood is closed. Close
and lock all doors and the hatch/
liftgate/trunk lid from the outside using
the key or press the lock button on
your keyless entry system transmitter.
qTo Stop an Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off by
any one of the following methods:
The following method will also arm the
theft-deterrent system:
Close the hood and the hatch/liftgate/
trunk lid . Press the area on the door-
lock switch marked “LOCK” once.
Close all doors.
l
Unlock a door with the key.
Open the trunk lid with the key.
Press the unlock button or press and
l
l
hold the trunk button on the keyless
entry system transmitter.
The engine is started with the ignition
l
key or the start knob.
The theft deterrent system can also be
armed by activating the auto re-lock
function with all the doors, the hatch/
liftgate/trunk lid and the hood closed.
NOTE
If you have any problem with the theft-
deterrent system, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
NOTE
Locking the doors with the inside door-lock
knob will not arm the system.
qTheft-Deterrent Labels
NOTE
Auto re-lock function
After unlocking with the transmitter, all doors
and the hatch/liftgate will automatically lock if
one of the doors or the hatch/liftgate/trunk lid
is not opened within about 30 seconds.
qTo Turn off an Armed System
An armed system can be turned off by any
one of the following methods:
l
Unlock a door with the key.
Press the unlock button on the keyless
l
A label indicating that your vehicle is
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is
in the glove box.
entry system transmitter.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
Mazda recommends that you affix it to the
lower rear corner of a front door window.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
Steering Wheel
Mirrors
qOutside Mirrors
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving:
Check the mirror angles before driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the
driver to abruptly turn to the left or
right. This can lead to loss of control
or an accident.
WARNING
Be sure to look over your shoulder
before changing lanes:
Changing lanes without taking into
account the actual distance of the
vehicle in the convex mirror is
dangerous. You could have a serious
accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears.
qSteering Wheel Adjustment
To change the angle or length of the
steering wheel:
Power mirror
1. Stop the vehicle, pull down the lock
release lever under the steering
column.
The ignition switch must be in the ACC
or ON position.
To adjust:
Lock release lever
1. Press the left or right side of the
selector switch to choose the left or
right side mirror.
2. Depress the mirror switch in the
appropriate direction.
Selector switch
Outside mirror
2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the
steering column length to the desired
positions, push the lever up to lock the
column.
Mirror switch
3. Push the wheel up and down to be
certain it's locked before driving.
After adjusting the mirror, lock the control
by placing the selector switch in the
middle position.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
Mirror defrosterí
Auto-dimming mirror
To turn on the mirror defrosters, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position and
push the rear window defroster switch
(page 5-52).
qRearview Mirror
WARNING
Do not stack cargo or objects higher
than the seatbacks:
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror,
which might cause you to hit another
car when changing lanes.
NOTE
For the manual day/night mirror, perform the
adjustment with the day/night lever in the day
position.
Rearview mirror adjustment
Reducing glare from headlights
Manual day/night mirror
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to center on the scene through the rear
window.
Push the day/night lever forward for day
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of
headlights from cars at the rear.
Manual day/night mirror
Day/Night lever
Day
Night
Auto-dimming mirror
The auto-dimming mirror automatically
reduces glare of headlights from cars at
the rear when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-39
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel the
automatic dimming function. The
indicator light will go off.
To reactivate the automatic dimming
function, press the ON button ( ). The
indicator light will illuminate.
NOTE
l
Do not use glass cleaner or suspend objects
on or around the light sensor. Otherwise,
light sensor sensitivity will be affected and
may not operate normally.
OFF button
ON button
Indicator light
Light sensor
Light sensor
l
For information regarding the 3 buttons
(
,
,
) on the auto-dimming
mirror, refer to HomeLink Wireless Control
System (page 5-54).
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
4
Important information about driving your Mazda.
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions ........................................ 4-2
Fuel Requirements .................................................................... 4-2
Emission Control System .......................................................... 4-3
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide) ......................................... 4-4
Before Starting the Engine ........................................................... 4-5
Before Getting In ...................................................................... 4-5
After Getting In ......................................................................... 4-5
Driving Tips................................................................................... 4-6
Break-In Period ......................................................................... 4-6
Money-Saving Suggestions ...................................................... 4-6
Hazardous Driving .................................................................... 4-7
Rocking the Vehicle .................................................................. 4-8
Winter Driving .......................................................................... 4-8
Driving In Flooded Area ........................................................... 4-9
Overloading ............................................................................ 4-10
Towing .......................................................................................... 4-11
Trailer Towing ......................................................................... 4-11
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Fuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.
Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.
Fuel
Octane Rating*(Anti-knock index)
Regular unleaded fuel
87 [ (R+M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system
to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.
CAUTION
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead
to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.
Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10% ethanol
by volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this
recommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of
any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.
Ø Never add fuel system additives. Never add cleaning agents other than those
specified by Mazda. Other cleaning agents and additives may damage the system.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10%. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name “Gasohol”.
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not
be covered by the Mazda warranty.
l
Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.
Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
l
l
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Emission Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of
this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.
WARNING
Never park over or near anything flammable:
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with
the engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and
could ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst
inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will
damage the converter and cause poor performance.
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Ø Don't drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
Ø Don't coast with the ignition switch turned off.
Ø Don't descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switch turned off.
Ø Don't operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.
Ø Don't tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by a qualified technician.
Ø Don't push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
NOTE
Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before
the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification
made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.
NOTE
After driving some distance and turning off the engine, the sound of a valve opening and closing can
be heard at the rear of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. Your vehicle has a
self-checking device and it operates after turning off the engine.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide)
WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness
and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully open
and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss
of consciousness or even death could occur.
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when
idling the engine:
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed
and the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which
contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or
even death could occur.
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe,
before starting the engine:
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The
exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.
Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of
consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Before Starting the Engine
Before Getting In
After Getting In
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Be sure the windows, outside mirrors,
and outside lights are clean.
Inspect inflation pressures and
condition of tires.
Look under the vehicle for any sign of
fluid leaks.
Are all doors closed and locked?
Is the seat adjusted properly?
Are the inside and outside mirrors
adjusted?
Is everyone's seat belt fastened?
Check all gauges.
Check all warning lights when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes off.
l
l
l
If you plan to back up, make sure
nothing is in your way.
NOTE
l
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake/clutch fluid,
washer fluid, and other fluid levels should be
inspected. See Maintenance, Section 8.
Always be thoroughly familiar with your
Mazda.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Break-In Period
Money-Saving Suggestions
No special break-in is necessary, but a few
precautions in the first 1,000 km (600
miles) may add to the performance,
economy, and life of your Mazda.
How you operate your Mazda determines
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
these suggestions to help save money on
fuel and repairs.
l
l
Don't race the engine.
Don't maintain one constant speed,
Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine
l
runs smoothly, begin driving.
Avoid fast starts.
Keep the engine tuned. Follow the
l
either slow or fast, for a long period of
time.
Don't drive constantly at full-throttle or
l
l
maintenance schedule (page 8-3) and
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
perform inspections and servicing.
high engine rpm for extended periods
of time.
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
l
l
Use the air conditioner only when
l
Avoid full-throttle starts.
necessary.
Slow down on rough roads.
Keep the tires properly inflated.
Don't carry unnecessary weight.
l
l
l
l
Don't rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Keep windows closed at high speeds.
Slow down when driving in crosswinds
l
l
l
and headwinds.
WARNING
Never stop the engine when going
down a hill:
Stopping the engine when going
down a hill is dangerous. This causes
the loss of power steering and power
brake control, and may cause
damage to the drivetrain. Any loss of
steering or braking control could
cause an accident.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
l
For more traction in starting on
Hazardous Driving
slippery surfaces, use sand, rock salt,
carpeting, or other nonslip material
under the front wheels.
WARNING
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to
downshift on slippery surfaces:
Downshifting into lower gear while
driving on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid.
This could lead to loss of vehicle
control and an accident.
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
The ABS cannot compensate for
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
speed, tailgating (following another
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire
friction and road contact because of
water on the road surface). You can
still have an accident.
When driving in water, mud, sand, or
similar hazards:
l
Be cautious and allow extra distance
for braking.
Avoid sudden braking and sudden
l
maneuvering.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
l
ABS, brake with the pedal by using a
light up-down motion. Do not hold the
pedal down constantly.
If your vehicle is equipped with ABS,
do not pump the brakes. Continue to
press down on the brake pedal.
Refer to Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) on page 5-7.
l
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front
wheels.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Rocking the Vehicle
Winter Driving
l
Carry emergency gear, window
WARNING
scraper, flares, a small shovel, jumper
cables, and a small bag of sand or salt.
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to
perform the following precautions:
Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in
the radiator.
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 8-20.
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold
reduces battery capacity.
Inspect the ignition system for damage
Do not spin the wheels at more than 56
km/h (35 mph), and do not allow
anyone to stand behind a wheel when
pushing the vehicle:
l
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning
the wheels at high speed is
dangerous. The spinning tire could
overheat and explode. This could
cause serious injuries.
l
l
and loose connections.
Use washer fluid made with
l
CAUTION
Too much rocking may cause engine
overheating, transaxle failure, and
tire damage.
antifreeze―but don't use engine
coolant antifreeze for washer fluid
(page 8-26).
l
Don't use the parking brake in freezing
weather as the parking brake may
freeze. Instead, shift to P with an
automatic transaxle and to 1 or R with
a manual transaxle. Block the rear
wheels.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand or mud, depress the
accelerator slightly and slowly move the
shift lever from 1 (D) to R.
qSnow Tires
Use snow tires on all four wheels
Don't go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)
while driving with snow tires. Inflate
snow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi)
more than recommended on the tire
pressure label (driver's door frame), but
never more than the maximum cold-tire
pressure shown on the tires.
Your vehicle is originally equipped with
all season radials designed to be used all
year around. In some extreme climates
you may find it necessary to replace them
with snow tires during the winter months
to further improve traction on snow and
ice covered roads.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Driving In Flooded Area
WARNING
Use only the same size and type tires
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four
wheels:
WARNING
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
Using tires different in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling
could be greatly affected and result
in an accident.
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
CAUTION
Check local regulations before using
studded tires.
NOTE
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded
roads as it could cause short
circuiting of electrical/electronic
parts, or engine damage or stalling
from water absorption. If the vehicle
has been immersed in water, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, the system may
not function correctly when using tires with
steel wire reinforcement in the sidewalls (page
5-29).
qTire Chains
This vehicle cannot be operated with tire
chains because it could cause interference
with the vehicle body and scratching.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Overloading
WARNING
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of your vehicle are on the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident
or vehicle damage. You can estimate
the weight of your load by weighing
the items (or people) before putting
them in the vehicle.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving Your Mazda
Towing
Trailer Towing
The Mazda6 is not designed for towing.
Never tow a trailer with your Mazda6.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
5
Explanation of instruments and controls.
Starting and Driving ..................................................................... 5-2
Ignition Switch .......................................................................... 5-2
Starting the Engine .................................................................... 5-4
Brake System ............................................................................ 5-5
Manual Transaxle Operation ..................................................... 5-9
Automatic Transaxle Controls ................................................ 5-12
Power Steering ........................................................................ 5-18
Cruise Control ......................................................................... 5-19
Traction Control System (TCS)í ........................................... 5-22
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí ......................................... 5-25
Instrument Cluster and Indicators ............................................ 5-31
Meters and Gauges .................................................................. 5-31
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds ............................ 5-35
Warning/Indicator Lights ........................................................ 5-35
Beep Sounds ........................................................................... 5-46
Switches and Controls ................................................................ 5-47
Lighting Control ..................................................................... 5-47
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ............................................... 5-49
Fog Lightsí ............................................................................ 5-49
Windshield Wipers and Washer .............................................. 5-50
Rear Window Wiper and Washerí ......................................... 5-51
Rear Window Defroster ........................................................... 5-52
Horn ........................................................................................ 5-53
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................................... 5-53
HomeLink Wireless Control Systemí .................................... 5-54
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Automatic transaxle
Ignition Switch
To turn the key from the ACC to the
LOCK position, the shift lever must be in
the P position.
qIgnition Switch Positions
Shift lever
engaged in P
(park)
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. Only in this position can the
key be removed.
Manual transaxle
To turn the key from the ACC to the
LOCK position, push the key in at the
ACC position, then turn it to the LOCK
position.
Push the key
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
ON
WARNING
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The warning lights
(except brakes) should be inspected
before the engine is started (page 5-35).
Remove the key only when the vehicle
is parked:
Removing the key from the ignition
switch while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. Removing the key allows
the steering wheel to lock. You will
lose steering control and a serious
accident could occur.
NOTE
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This
does not indicate an abnormality.
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key to LOCK position, set the
parking brake and make sure the shift
lever is in P with an automatic
transaxle or in 1 or R with a manual
transaxle:
START
The engine is started in this position. It
will crank until you release the key; then
it returns to the ON position. The brake
warning light can be checked after the
engine is started (page 5-35).
Intentionally placing the key into
LOCK position is much more
important where you will not be
removing the key to leave the vehicle
and because leaving it in other
positions will disable some of the
vehicle security systems and run the
battery down.
qIgnition Key Reminder
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
ACC position with the key inserted, a
continuous beep sound will be heard
when the driver's door is opened.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and the shift lever is in P with an
automatic transaxle or in 1 or R with
a manual transaxle is dangerous.
Unexpected vehicle movement could
occur. This could cause an accident.
NOTE
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering
wheel from side to side.
Leaving the key in any position but LOCK
position also disables some of the security
features and may run the battery down.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel unlocks and some
electrical accessories will operate.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Starting the Engine
CAUTION
Don't try the starter for more than 10
seconds at a time. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 10 seconds
before trying again. Otherwise, you
may damage the starter and drain
the battery.
NOTE
Engine-starting is controlled by the spark
ignition system.
This system meets all Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Standard requirements
regulating the impulse electrical field strength
of radio noise.
6. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about 10 seconds.
1. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
NOTE
_
l
In extremely cold weather, below 18 °C
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
(0 °F), or after the vehicle has not been
driven in several days, let the engine warm
up without operating the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without use of the
accelerator.
4. (Manual transaxle)
Depress the clutch pedal all the way
and shift into neutral.
Keep the clutch pedal depressed while
cranking the engine.
l
(Automatic transaxle)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
NOTE
(Manual transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the clutch pedal
is not depressed all the way.
(Automatic transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is
not in P or N.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position and hold (up to 10 seconds at
a time) until the engine starts.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Brake System
WARNING
Dry brakes that have become wet by
driving very slowly and applying the
brakes lightly until brake performance
is normal:
qFoot Brake
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
use.
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by
applying greater force than normal to the
brake pedal. But the distance required to
stop will be greater than usual.
WARNING
qParking Brake
Do not coast with the engine stalled or
turned off, find a safe place to stop:
Coasting with the engine stalled or
turned off is dangerous. Braking will
require more effort, and the brake's
power-assist could be depleted if you
pump the brake. This will cause
longer stopping distances or even an
accident.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key to LOCK position, set the
parking brake and make sure the shift
lever is in P with an automatic
transaxle or in 1 or R with a manual
transaxle:
Intentionally placing the key into
LOCK position is much more
Shift to a lower gear when going down
steep hills:
important where you will not be
removing the key to leave the vehicle
and because leaving it in other
positions will disable some of the
vehicle security systems and run the
battery down.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and the shift lever is in P with an
automatic transaxle or in 1 or R with
a manual transaxle is dangerous.
Unexpected vehicle movement could
occur. This could cause an accident.
Driving with your foot continuously
on the brake pedal or steadily
applying the brakes for long
distances is dangerous. This causes
overheated brakes, resulting in
longer stopping distances or even
total brake failure. This could cause
loss of vehicle control and a serious
accident. Avoid continuous
application of the brakes.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Releasing the parking brake
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake on
will cause excessive wear of the brake
linings or pads.
Depress the brake pedal and pull the
parking brake lever upwards, then press
the release button. While holding the
button, lower the parking brake lever all
the way down to the released position.
NOTE
For parking in snow, refer to Winter Driving
(page 4-8) regarding parking brake use.
Setting the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and then firmly
pull the parking brake lever fully upwards
with a greater amount of force than is
required so that the vehicle holds in the
stationary position.
qBrake System Warning Light
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning
The light comes on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It goes off
when the parking brake is fully released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the light stays on after the parking brake
is fully released, you may have a brake
problem.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
You may notice that the pedal is harder to
push or that it may go closer to the floor.
In either case, it will take longer to stop
the vehicle.
qAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one
is about to lock up, the ABS responds by
automatically releasing and reapplying
that wheel's brake.
1. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (page 8-22).
The driver will feel a slight vibration in
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is
normal when the ABS operates. Don't
pump the brakes, continue to press down
on the brake pedal.
2. After adding fluid, check the light
again.
If the warning light remains on, or if the
brakes do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
Even if the light goes out have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The ABS cannot compensate for
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
speed, tailgating (following another
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire
friction and road contact because of
water on the road surface). You can
still have an accident.
NOTE
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the
brake light is no longer illuminated.
WARNING
NOTE
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
l
Braking distances may be longer on loose
surfaces (snow or gravel, for example)
which usually have a hard foundation. A
vehicle with a normal braking system may
require less distance to stop under these
conditions because the tires will build up a
wedge of surface layer when the wheels
skid.
warning light illuminated is
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
l
The sound of the ABS operating may be
heard when starting the engine or
immediately after starting the vehicle.
However, it does not indicate a malfunction.
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qABS Warning Light
qElectronic Brake Force
Distribution System Warning
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may turn the brake system
warning light and the ABS warning light
on at the same time. The problem is likely
to be the electronic brake force
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
distribution system.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
NOTE
When the engine is jump-started to charge the
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light comes on. This is due to a weak
battery, not a malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated at the same time is
dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qBrake Pad Wear Indicator
Manual Transaxle Operation
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
qManual Transaxle Shift Pattern
Neutral position
The shift pattern of the transaxle is
conventional, as shown.
When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down
while shifting; then release it slowly.
A safety feature prevents accidental
shifting from 5 to R (reverse). The shift
lever must be put in neutral before being
shifted to R.
WARNING
Do not drive with worn disc pads:
Driving with worn disc pads is
dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qRecommendations for Shifting
Upshifting
WARNING
Do not use sudden engine braking on
slippery road surfaces or at high
speeds:
2.3-liter engine
For normal acceleration, we recommend
these shift points.
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
Gear
Vehicle speed
26 km/h (16 mph)
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
45 km/h (28 mph)
53 km/h (33 mph)
63 km/h (39 mph)
For cruising
Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R
position and set the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle unattended:
Otherwise the vehicle could move
and cause an accident.
Gear
1 to 2
Vehicle speed
13 km/h (8 mph)
32 km/h (20 mph)
50 km/h (31 mph)
68 km/h (42 mph)
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
3.0-liter engine
CAUTION
For normal acceleration, we recommend
these shift points.
Ø Keep your foot off the clutch pedal
except when shifting gears. Also,
don't use the clutch to hold the
vehicle on an upgrade. Riding the
clutch will cause needless clutch
wear and damage.
Ø Make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting to R.
Shifting to R while the vehicle is
still moving may damage the
transaxle.
Gear
Vehicle speed
27 km/h (17 mph)
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
48 km/h (30 mph)
56 km/h (35 mph)
63 km/h (39 mph)
For cruising
Gear
1 to 2
Vehicle speed
13 km/h (8 mph)
34 km/h (21 mph)
52 km/h (32 mph)
66 km/h (41 mph)
2 to 3
NOTE
3 to 4
If shifting to R is difficult, shift back into
neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try
again.
4 to 5
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift
before the engine starts to overwork. This
reduces the chance of stalling and gives
better acceleration when you need more
speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Automatic Transaxle Controls
Various Lockouts:
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal to shift (The ignition
switch must be in the ACC or ON position).
Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.
NOTE
This Sport AT has an option that is not included in traditional automatic transaxle - giving the driver
the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to shift gears. Even if you
intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional automatic, you should also be aware
that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be retained as
you change speeds. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing, confirm
you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page 5-14).
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTransaxle Ranges
WARNING
If the engine is running faster than idle,
do not shift from N or P into a driving
gear:
The shift lever must be in P or N to
operate the starter.
P (Park)
It's dangerous to shift from N or P
into a driving gear when the engine
is running faster than idle. If this is
done, the vehicle could move
suddenly, causing an accident or
serious injury.
P locks the transaxle and prevents the
front wheels from rotating.
WARNING
Always set the shift lever to P and set
the parking brake:
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle:
Only setting the shift lever to the P
position without using the parking
brake to hold the vehicle is
dangerous. If P fails to hold, the
vehicle could move and cause an
accident.
Shifting into N while driving is
dangerous. Engine braking cannot be
applied when decelerating which
could lead to an accident or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Ø Shifting into P, N or R while the
vehicle is moving can damage
your transaxle.
Ø Shifting into a driving gear or
reverse when the engine is running
faster than idle can damage the
transaxle.
CAUTION
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle
damage.
NOTE
Apply the parking brake or depress the brake
pedal before moving the shift lever from N to
prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
R (Reverse)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
backward. You must be at a complete stop
before shifting to or from R, except under
rare circumstances as explained in
Rocking the Vehicle (page 4-8).
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position. From a
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift
through a 5-gear/6-gear* sequence.
* 3.0-liter engine model
N (Neutral)
M (Manual)
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or brakes are on.
M is the manual shift mode position.
Gears can be shifted up or down by
operating the shift lever.
Refer to Manual Shift Mode (page 5-14).
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
To return to automatic shift mode, shift
the lever from M to D.
qShift-Lock System
The shift-lock system prevents shifting
out of P unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
NOTE
l
If you change to manual shift mode when
the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift to
M1.
To shift from P:
l
If you shift up once when the vehicle is
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Move the shift lever.
NOTE
When the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.
stopped and the gear is at M1, the gear will
shift to M2. M2 is helpful for starting on
slippery surfaces.
l
(2.3-liter engine model)
If you change to manual shift mode without
depressing the accelerator pedal when
driving in D range, 5th gear, the gear will
shift to M4.
l
(3.0-liter engine model)
l
To be sure the vehicle is in park, the
If you change to manual shift mode without
depressing the accelerator pedal when
driving in D range, the gear will shift to a
lower gear (Ex; the gear changes from D
range, 5th to M4).
ignition key cannot be removed unless the
shift lever is in P.
qManual Shift Mode
This mode gives you the feel of driving a
manual transaxle vehicle by operating the
shift lever and allows you to control
engine rpm and torque to the front wheels
much like a manual transaxle when more
control is desired.
Indicators
Shift position indicator
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indicator in the instrument panel
illuminates.
To change to manual shift mode, shift the
lever from D to M.
Gear position indicator
The numeral for the selected gear
illuminates.
Shift position
indicator
Gear position
indicator
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
NOTE
l
l
If the gears cannot be shifted down when
When driving slowly, the gears may not
shift up depending on vehicle speed.
In manual shift mode, gears do not shift up
automatically. Don't run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE. If the
tachometer needle enters the RED ZONE,
you may feel engine-braking because the
fuel delivery will be stopped to protect the
engine. However, this does not indicate an
abnormality.
Gears may not be shifted from M1 to M2
right after shifting the lever from D to M.
Wait a few seconds and then shift up to M2.
When depressing the accelerator fully, the
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
driving at higher speeds, the gear position
indicator will flash twice to signal that the
gears cannot be shifted down.
l
l
(2.3-liter engine model)
If the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)
temperature becomes too high, there is the
possibility that the transaxle will switch to
automatic shift mode, canceling manual
shift mode and turning off the gear position
indicator illumination. This is a normal
function to protect the AT. After the ATF
temperature has decreased, the gear
position indicator illumination turns back
on and driving in manual shift mode is
restored.
l
l
depending on vehicle speed.
Shifting
Manually Shifting down
(M6*→M5→M4→M3→M2→M1)
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the shift
lever forward ( ) once.
Manually Shifting up
(M1→M2→M3→M4→M5→M6*)
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shift
lever back ( ) once.
* 3.0-liter engine model
* 3.0-liter engine model
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Shifting down
WARNING
Do not use sudden engine braking on
slippery road surfaces or at high
speeds:
If the vehicle speed is higher than the speed specified
for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted down to a
lower gear.
Gear
M5→M4
Vehicle speed
195 km/h (121 mph)
140 km/h (87 mph)
94 km/h (59 mph)
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
M4→M3
M3→M2
M2→M1
47 km/h (30 mph)
During deceleration, the gears shift down
automatically when speed is reduced to the
following:
Gear
Vehicle speed
M5 or M4→M3 30 km/h (18 mph)
NOTE
M3 or M2→M1 10 km/h (6 mph)
l
When driving at high speeds, the gear may
not shift down depending on vehicle speed.
During deceleration, the gear may
NOTE
l
If the vehicle is driven at a low speed from a
standing start while in M2, the gear will not
shift down to M1 automatically until the shift
lever is tapped back ( ) or forward ( ).
automatically shift down depending on
vehicle speed.
When depressing the accelerator fully, the
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed.
l
If the vehicle is kicked down at the following speeds
or lower, the gears shift down automatically:
Shifting specification (2.3-liter engine
model)
Gear
M5→M4
Vehicle speed
182 km/h (113 mph)
133 km/h (82 mph)
48 km/h (30 mph)
12 km/h (7 mph)
Shifting up
M4→M3
M3→M2
M2→M1
If the vehicle speed is lower than the speed specified
for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted up to a
higher gear.
Gear
M1→M2
Vehicle speed
Shifting specification (3.0-liter engine
model)
You can shift up to M2 whether
the vehicle is stopped or moving.
Shifting up
M2→M3
M3→M4
M4→M5
20 km/h (12 mph)
If the vehicle speed is lower than the speed specified
for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted up to a
higher gear.
33 km/h (21 mph)
Gear
M1→M2
Vehicle speed
You can shift up to M2 whether
the vehicle is stopped or moving.
M2→M3
M3→M4
M4→M5
M5→M6
10 km/h (6 mph)
23 km/h (14 mph)
39 km/h (24 mph)
49 km/h (30 mph)
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Shifting down
Recommendations for shifting
If the vehicle speed is higher than the speed specified
for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted down to a
lower gear.
Upshifting
For normal acceleration and cruising, we recommend
these shift points.
(2.3-liter engine model)
Gear
M5→M4
Vehicle speed
175 km/h (109 mph)
130 km/h (81 mph)
83 km/h (52 mph)
Gear
M1 to M2
Vehicle speed
24 km/h (15 mph)
M4→M3
M3→M2
M2→M1
M2 to M3
M3 to M4
M4 to M5
40 km/h (25 mph)
65 km/h (40 mph)
73 km/h (45 mph)
43 km/h (27 mph)
During deceleration, the gears shift down
automatically when speed is reduced to the
following:
(3.0-liter engine model)
Gear
Vehicle speed
Gear
M6→M5
Vehicle speed
50 km/h (31 mph)
M1 to M2
M2 to M3
M3 to M4
M4 to M5
M5 to M6
24 km/h (15 mph)
40 km/h (25 mph)
M5→M4
38 km/h (23 mph)
27 km/h (16 mph)
10 km/h (6 mph)
65 km/h (40 mph)
73 km/h (45 mph)
80 km/h (50 mph)
M4→M3
M3 or M2→M1
NOTE
Downshifting
If the vehicle is driven at a low speed from a
standing start while in M2, the gear may not
shift down to M1 automatically.
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift
before the engine starts to overwork. This
gives better acceleration when you need
more speed.
If the vehicle is kicked down at the following speeds
or lower, the gears shift down automatically:
Gear
M6→M5
Vehicle speed
212 km/h (131 mph)
161 km/h (100 mph)
161 km/h (100 mph)
70 km/h (44 mph)
70 km/h (44 mph)
46 km/h (28 mph)
46 km/h (28 mph)
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
M6→M4
M5→M4
M5→M3
M4→M3
M4→M2
M3→M2
qDriving Tips
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
Power Steering
Power steering is only operable when the
engine is running. If the engine is off or if
the power steering system is inoperable,
you can still steer, but it requires more
physical effort.
3. Release the brake pedal while
gradually accelerating.
Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to
lower gears, depending on load weight
and grade steepness. Descend slowly,
using the brakes only occasionally to
prevent them from overheating.
If the steering feels stiffer than usual
during normal driving, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme left or right for more than 5
seconds with the engine running.
This could damage the power
steering system.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qActivation/Deactivation
Cruise Control
To activate the system, press the ON/OFF
switch.
The cruise main indicator light
illuminates.
With cruise control, you can set and
automatically maintain any speed of more
than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under the
following conditions:
To deactivate the system, press the switch
again.
The cruise main indicator light turns off.
Using the cruise control under the
following conditions is dangerous
and could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Ø Hilly terrain
Ø Steep inclines
Ø Heavy or unsteady traffic
Ø Slippery or winding roads
Ø Similar restrictions that require
inconsistent speed
qCruise Main Indicator Light
WARNING
Keep the ON/OFF switch off when
cruise control is not in use:
Leaving the ON/OFF switch on when
not using the cruise control is
dangerous as you may hit one of the
other buttons and put the vehicle in
cruise control unexpectedly. This
could result in loss of vehicle control.
This light comes on when the ON/OFF
switch is pressed and the cruise control
system is activated.
qTo Set Speed
qCruise Set Indicator Light
1. Activate the cruise control system by
pressing the ON/OFF switch.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 30 km/h (19 mph).
This light comes on when a cruising speed
is set.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
3. Press the SET/COAST button and
release it at the speed you want.
Release the accelerator at the same
time.
qTo Increase Cruising Speed
Follow either of these procedures.
To increase speed using cruise control
switch
Press the RES/ACCEL button and hold it.
Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the button at the speed you want.
Don't continue to hold in the button. Until
you release it, speed will continue to drop
(unless you continue to accelerate) and
you'll miss the desired speed.
NOTE
Your vehicle has a tap-up feature that
allows you to increase your current speed
in increments of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a
momentary tap of the RES/ACCEL
button. Multiple taps will increase your
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each
tap.
l
The SET function can't be activated until
about 2 seconds after the ON/OFF switch
has been engaged.
l
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down going up or speed
up while going down.
l
Cruise control will turn off if vehicle speed
drops below 30 km/h (19 mph) when cruise
is activated, such as when climbing a steep
grade.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Your vehicle has a tap-down feature that
allows you to decrease your current speed
in decrements of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a
momentary tap of the SET/COAST
button. Multiple taps will decrease your
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each
tap.
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate
to the desired speed.
Press the SET/COAST button and release
it immediately.
qTo Resume Cruising Speed at
More Than 30 km/h (19 mph)
If some other method besides the ON/
OFF switch was used to cancel cruising
speed (such as applying the brake pedal)
and the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically resume
when the RES/ACCEL button is pressed.
If vehicle speed is below 30 km/h (19
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 30
km/h (19 mph) and press the RES/
ACCEL button.
NOTE
Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on. Greater speed
will not interfere with or change the set speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator to return to
the set speed.
qTo Decrease Cruising Speed
Press the SET/COAST button and hold it.
The vehicle will gradually slow.
Release the button at the speed you want.
qTo Cancel
To cancel the system, use one of these
methods:
l
Press the ON/OFF switch.
Slightly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
l
l
transaxle only).
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
Press the CANCEL button.
Traction Control System
(TCS)í
The Traction Control System (TCS)
enhances traction and safety by
controlling engine torque. When the TCS
detects driving wheel slippage, it lowers
engine torque to prevent loss of traction.
This means that on a slick surface, the
engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels
without causing them to spin and lose
traction.
The system is off when the ignition is off.
NOTE
WARNING
Cruise control will cancel at about 15 km/h (9
mph) below the preset speed (such as may
happen when climbing a long, steep grade) or
below 30 km/h (19 mph).
Do not rely on the traction control
system as a substitute for safe driving:
The traction control system (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident.
Use snow tires and drive at reduced
speeds when roads are covered with ice
and/or snow:
Driving without proper traction
devices on snow and/or ice-covered
roads is dangerous. The traction
control system (TCS) alone cannot
provide adequate traction and you
could still have an accident.
5-22
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
If the light stays on when the TCS is not
switched off, take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The TCS may
have a malfunction.
qTCS Indicator Light
NOTE
(3.0-liter engine model)
After starting the engine when the coolant
temperature is extremely low, the TCS is
automatically turned off. At this time, the TCS
OFF indicator light will remain on, but this
does not indicate an abnormality. After the
engine has warmed, TCS will resume normal
operation and the indicator light will go out.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS is
operating, the indicator light flashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS may have a
malfunction and it may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qTCS OFF Switch
Press the TCS OFF switch to turn off the
TCS. The TCS OFF indicator light will
illuminate.
NOTE
l
In addition to the indicator light flashing, a
slight lugging sound will come from the
engine. This indicates that the TCS is
operating properly.
l
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it
will be impossible to achieve high rpm
when the TCS is on.
qTCS OFF Indicator Light
Press the switch again to turn the TCS
back on. The TCS OFF indicator light
will go out.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
It also comes on when the TCS OFF
switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
l
When TCS is on and you attempt to free the
vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of
freshly fallen snow, the TCS will activate.
Depressing the accelerator will not
increase engine power and freeing the
vehicle may be difficult. When this happens,
turn off the TCS.
l
If the TCS is off when the engine is turned
off, it automatically activates when the
ignition switch is turned on.
l
Leaving the TCS on will provide the best
traction.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors the pressure for each tire.
If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the
warning light in the instrument panel and by the warning beep sound.
The tire pressure sensors installed on each wheel send tire pressure data by radio signal to
the receiver unit in the vehicle.
Tire pressure sensors
NOTE
When the ambient temperature is low due to seasonal changes, tire temperatures are also lower.
When the tire temperature decreases, the air pressure decreases as well. The TPMS warning light
may illuminate more frequently. Visually inspect the tires daily before driving, and check tire
pressures monthly with a tire pressure gauge. When checking tire pressures, use of a digital tire
pressure gauge is recommended.
TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all four tires
regularly.
íSome models.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
CAUTION
Ø Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Ø Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Ø To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a
problem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or
blow out.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes, or
the tire pressure warning beep sound is
heard, decrease vehicle speed
immediately and avoid sudden
maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes,
or the tire pressure warning beep
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
perform sudden maneuvering or
braking. Vehicle drivability could
worsen and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
where you can check the visual
condition of the tire and determine if
you have enough air to proceed to a
place where air may be added and
the system monitored again, an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
repair station.
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is
too low in one or more tires, and flashes
when there is a system malfunction.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken
care of as soon as possible before it
develops into a more serious
situation that could lead to tire
failure and a dangerous accident.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire
pressure. Refer to the specification charts
(page 10-7).
NOTE
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary
according to the tire temperature, therefore
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting
the tire pressures. When pressure is
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may
turn on after the tires cool and pressure
drops below specification.
CAUTION
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature, may go
out if the ambient temperature rises. In this
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the
tire air pressures.
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may
require some time for the TPMS warning
light to go out. If the TPMS warning light
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10
minutes, and then verify that it goes out.
Tires can loose a little air quite naturally
over time and the TPMS cannot tell if the
tires are getting too soft over time or you
have a flat. However, when you find one
low tire in a set of four - that is an
l
indication of trouble; you should have
someone drive the vehicle slowly forward
so you can inspect any low tire for cuts and
any metal sticking through tread or
sidewall. Put a few drops of water in the
valve stem to see if it bubbles indicating a
bad valve. Leaks need to be addressed by
more than simply refilling the trouble tire as
leaks are dangerous - take it to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer which has all the
equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems and
order the best replacement tire for your
vehicle.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
If the warning light illuminates again even
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there
may be a tire puncture. Replace the
punctured tire with the temporary spare
tire (page 7-8).
qTires and Wheels
CAUTION
When inspecting or adjusting the tire
air pressures, do not apply excessive
force to the stem part of the wheel
unit. The stem part could be
damaged.
NOTE
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used.
Changing tires and wheels
The following procedure allows the
TPMS to recognize a tire pressure sensor's
unique ID signal code whenever tires or
wheels are changed, such as changing to
and from winter tires.
Warning light flashes
When the warning light flashes, there may
be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
qSystem Error Activation
Each tire pressure sensor has a unique ID
signal code. The signal code must be
registered with the TPMS before it can work.
The easiest way to do it is to have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer change your tire and
complete ID signal code registration.
When the TPMS warning light flashes,
there may be a system malfunction.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
A system error activation may occur in
the following cases:
l
When there is equipment or a device
When having tires changed at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer
near the vehicle using the same radio
frequency as that of the tire pressure
sensors.
Tire pressure sensor ID signal code
registration is completed when an
Authorized Mazda Dealer changes your
vehicle's tires.
l
When using the following devices in
the vehicle that may cause radio
interference with the receiver unit.
l
A digital device such as a personal
When changing tires yourself
computer.
A current converter device such as a
l
If you or someone else changes tires, you
or someone else can also undertake the
steps for the TPMS to complete the ID
signal code registration.
DC-AC converter.
When excess snow or ice adheres to
l
the vehicle, especially around the
wheels.
When the tire pressure sensor batteries
1. After tires have been changed, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position, then
turn it back to the ACC or LOCK
position.
l
are exhausted.
When using a wheel with no tire
l
pressure sensor installed.
When using tires with steel wire
l
2. Wait for about 15 minutes.
reinforcement in the side walls.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
3. After about 15 minutes, drive the
vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h
(16 mph) for 10 minutes and the tire
pressure sensor ID signal code will be
registered automatically.
A new tire pressure sensor is installed
to a new wheel.
NOTE
l
The tire pressure sensor ID signal code
must be registered when a new tire pressure
sensor is purchased. For purchase of a tire
pressure sensor and registration of the tire
pressure sensor ID signal code, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When reinstalling a previously removed tire
pressure sensor to a wheel, replace the
grommet (seal between valve body/sensor
and wheel) for the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven within about 15 minutes
of changing tires, the tire pressure monitoring
system warning light will flash because the
sensor ID signal code would not have been
registered. If this happens, park the vehicle for
about 15 minutes, after which the sensor ID
signal code will register upon driving the
vehicle for 10 minutes.
l
Replacing tires and wheels
CAUTION
Ø When replacing/repairing the tires
or wheels or both, have the work
done by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer, or the tire pressure sensors
may be damaged.
Ø The wheels equipped on your
Mazda are specially designed for
installation of the tire pressure
sensors. Do not use non-genuine
wheels, otherwise it may not be
possible to install the tire pressure
sensors.
Be sure to have the tire pressure sensors
installed whenever tires or wheels are
replaced.
When having a tire or wheel or both
replaced, the following types of tire
pressure sensor installations are possible.
l
The tire pressure sensor is removed
from the old wheel and installed to the
new one.
The same tire pressure sensor is used
l
with the same wheel. Only the tire is
replaced.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
Meters and Gauges
(Black-out meter)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the dashboard gauges illuminate.
Speedometer ...................................................................................................... page 5-32
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................. page 5-32
Tachometer ........................................................................................................ page 5-33
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................................................................. page 5-33
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................................................ page 5-34
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
NOTE
(Standard meter)
The odometer and trip meter can be displayed
as follows even when the ignition switch is in
the ACC or LOCK position.
qSpeedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of
the vehicle.
qOdometer, Trip Meter and Trip
The headlight switch must be in the
or
Meter Selector
position to see the display.
l
Displays for 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK
position from the ON position.
Displays for 10 minutes after any door is
opened.
The display mode can be changed
between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the selector while one of them is
displayed. The selected mode will be
displayed.
l
Odometer
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
Selector
Trip meter
The trip meter can record the total
distance of two trips. One is recorded in
trip meter A, and the other is recorded in
trip meter B.
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and trip
meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is filled.
Odometer
Trip meter A
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
Press the selector
Odometer
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
Trip meter B
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter is
again reset. Return it to “0.0” by holding
the selector depressed for more than 1
second. Use this meter to measure trip
distances and to compute fuel
Press the selector
consumption.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
NOTE
q
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
l
Only the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
The engine coolant temperature gauge
shows the temperature of the engine
coolant.
l
The trip record will be erased when:
The power supply is interrupted (blown
l
fuse or the battery is disconnected).
The vehicle is driven over 999.9 km
l
(mile).
qTachometer
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
If the needle is near H, it indicates
overheating.
Red zone
CAUTION
Driving with an overheated engine
can cause serious engine damage
(page 7-14).
CAUTION
Don't run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
qFuel Gauge
Bright
Dim
The fuel gauge shows approximately how
much fuel is in the tank. We recommend
keeping the tank over 1/4 full. When the
low fuel warning light illuminates or
when the needle is near E, refuel as soon
as possible.
Canceling the illumination dimmer
(Black-out meter and dashboard
illuminations)
Low fuel
warning light
When the headlight switch is in the or
position, the illumination of the
instrument cluster and the information
display dims.
NOTE
The direction of the arrow (
the fuel-filler lid is on the left side of the
vehicle.
When driving on snowy or foggy roads,
or in other situations when the instrument
cluster or information display's visibility
is reduced due to glare from surrounding
brightness, cancel the illumination
dimmer and increase the illumination
intensity.
) shown that
qDashboard Illumination
Rotate the thumb wheel to adjust the
brightness of the instrument cluster and
other illuminations in the dashboard.
To cancel the illumination dimmer, rotate
the thumb wheel upward fully. You may
hear a click sound and the illumination
dimmer will be canceled.
NOTE
l
The brightness of dashboard illuminations
(except instrument cluster) can be adjusted
when the headlight switch is in the
position.
(Black-out meter)
The brightness of the instrument cluster
illumination can be adjusted when the
headlight switch is in any position.
or
NOTE
If the dashboard illumination switch is kept at
the illumination dimmer cancel position, the
instrument cluster and the information display
will not dim when the headlight switch is
l
turned to the
or
position again.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Warning/Indicator Lights
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
Signal
Warning/Indicator Lights
Brake System Warning Light
Page
5-37
Charging System Warning Light
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
Check Engine Light
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-37
5-39
5-40
ABS Warning Light
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light
Low Fuel Warning Light
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Signal
Warning/Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep
Page
5-40
Door-Ajar Warning Light
5-41
5-41
5-41
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
5-41
Security Indicator Light
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-45
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light
Shift Position Indicator Light
TCS Indicator Light
TCS OFF Indicator Light
Cruise Main Indicator Light
Cruise Set Indicator Light
Light-On Indicator Light
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
qBrake System Warning Light
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the
brake light is no longer illuminated.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning
The light comes on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It goes off
when the parking brake is fully released.
warning light illuminated is
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
Low brake fluid level warning
If the light stays on after the parking brake
is fully released, you may have a brake
problem.
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way.
qABS Warning Light
You may notice that the pedal is harder to
push or that it may go closer to the floor.
In either case, it will take longer to stop
the vehicle.
1. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (page 8-22).
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
2. After adding fluid, check the light
again.
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
If the warning light remains on, or if the
brakes do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Even if the light goes out have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
qCharging System Warning Light
When the engine is jump-started to charge the
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light comes on. This is due to a weak
battery, not a malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
qElectronic Brake Force
Distribution System Warning
This warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and turns off when the engine is
started.
If the warning light illuminates while
driving, it indicates a malfunction of the
alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may turn the brake system
warning light and the ABS warning light
on at the same time. The problem is likely
to be the electronic brake force
CAUTION
Don't continue driving when the
charging system warning light is
illuminated because the engine could
stop unexpectedly.
distribution system.
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
q
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated at the same time is
dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
This warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and turns off when the engine is
started.
This warning light indicates low engine
oil pressure.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
If the light illuminates while driving:
The check engine light may come on in
the following cases:
The fuel tank level being very low or
1. Drive to the side of the road and park
off the right-of-way on level ground.
l
approaching empty.
The engine's electrical system has a
l
2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan.
problem.
The emission control system has a
l
problem.
The fuel-filler cap is missing or not
3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 8-19).
If it's low, add oil.
l
tightened securely.
4. Start the engine and check the warning
light.
If the check engine light remains on or
flashes continuously, do not drive at high
speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
If the light remains illuminated even after
you add oil, stop the engine immediately
and have your vehicle towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Light
CAUTION
Don't run the engine if oil pressure is
low. It could result in extensive
engine damage.
qCheck Engine Light
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner
system is working properly, the warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
This indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and goes off when the engine is
started.
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
If this light comes on while driving, the
vehicle may have a problem. It is
important to note the driving conditions
when the light came on and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Conditions of operation
WARNING
Condition
Result
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard
position.
for about 6 seconds.
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
The driver's seat belt is
fastened while the warning
light and the beep sound are
activated.
The warning light
turns off and the beep
sound stops.
The driver's seat belt is
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be
The warning light will
position.
heard.
qLow Fuel Warning Light
Belt minder
NOTE
Low fuel
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate and
restore the seat belt minder.
warning light
The belt minder is a supplemental
warning to the seat belt warning function.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the warning light/beep
operates to give you further reminders
according to the chart below.
This warning light in the fuel gauge
signals that the fuel tank will soon be
empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
qSeat Belt Warning Light/Beep
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Seat belt
Indicator
Beep
The seat belt warning light illuminates
and a beep sound will be heard if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
q
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light
qDoor-Ajar Warning Light
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
The light illuminates when the transaxle
has a problem.
CAUTION
This warning light comes on when any
door isn't securely closed.
Close the door securely.
If the automatic transaxle warning
light illuminates, the transaxle has
an electrical problem. Continuing to
drive your Mazda in this condition
could cause damage to your
qLow Washer Fluid Level
Warning Lightí
transaxle. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Lightí
This warning light indicates that little
washer fluid remains. Add fluid (page
8-26).
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is
too low in one or more tires, and flashes
when there is a system malfunction.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-41
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire
pressure. Refer to the specification charts
(page 10-7).
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes, or
the tire pressure warning beep sound is
heard, decrease vehicle speed
immediately and avoid sudden
maneuvering and braking:
CAUTION
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes,
or the tire pressure warning beep
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
perform sudden maneuvering or
braking. Vehicle drivability could
worsen and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
where you can check the visual
condition of the tire and determine if
you have enough air to proceed to a
place where air may be added and
the system monitored again, an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
repair station.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken
care of as soon as possible before it
develops into a more serious
situation that could lead to tire
failure and a dangerous accident.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
If the warning light illuminates again even
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there
may be a tire puncture. Replace the
punctured tire with the temporary spare
tire (page 7-8).
according to the tire temperature, therefore
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting
the tire pressures. When pressure is
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may
turn on after the tires cool and pressure
drops below specification.
NOTE
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature, may go
out if the ambient temperature rises. In this
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the
tire air pressures.
Warning light flashes
When the warning light flashes, there may
be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qSecurity Indicator Light
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may
require some time for the TPMS warning
light to go out. If the TPMS warning light
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10
minutes, and then verify that it goes out.
Tires can loose a little air quite naturally
over time and the TPMS cannot tell if the
tires are getting too soft over time or you
have a flat. However, when you find one
low tire in a set of four - that is an
This indicator light starts flashing every 2
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
from the ON to the ACC position and the
immobilizer system is armed.
l
The light stops flashing when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the correct ignition key.
At this time, the immobilizer system is
disarmed and the light illuminates for
about 3 seconds and then goes out.
indication of trouble; you should have
someone drive the vehicle slowly forward
so you can inspect any low tire for cuts and
any metal sticking through tread or
sidewall. Put a few drops of water in the
valve stem to see if it bubbles indicating a
bad valve. Leaks need to be addressed by
more than simply refilling the trouble tire as
leaks are dangerous - take it to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer which has all the
equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems and
order the best replacement tire for your
vehicle.
If the engine doesn't start with the correct
ignition key, and the security indicator
light keeps illuminating or flashing, the
system may have a malfunction. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Gear position indicator
qHeadlight High-Beam Indicator
Light
When the shift lever is in the D or M
position, the numeral for the selected gear
displays.
qTCS Indicator Lightí
This light indicates one of two things:
l
The high-beam headlights are on.
The turn signal lever is in the flash-to-
l
pass position.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS is
qShift Position Indicator Light
(Automatic Transaxle)
operating, the indicator light flashes.
This indicates the selected shift position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
If the light stays on, the TCS may have a
malfunction and it may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l
In addition to the indicator light flashing, a
slight lugging sound will come from the
engine. This indicates that the TCS is
operating properly.
l
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it
will be impossible to achieve high rpm
when the TCS is on.
Gear position indicator
5-44
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
qTCS OFF Indicator Lightí
qCruise Set Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
This light comes on when a cruising speed
is set.
It also comes on when the TCS OFF
switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.
qLight-On Indicator Light (Black-
out meter)
If the light stays on when the TCS is not
switched off, take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The TCS may
have a malfunction.
NOTE
(3.0-liter engine model)
After starting the engine when the coolant
temperature is extremely low, the TCS is
automatically turned off. At this time, the TCS
OFF indicator light will remain on, but this
does not indicate an abnormality. After the
engine has warmed, TCS will resume normal
operation and the indicator light will go out.
This indicator light comes on when the
exterior lights and dashboard illumination
are on.
qTurn-Signal/Hazard Warning
Indicator Lights
qCruise Main Indicator Light
When operating the turn signal lights, the
left or right turn signal indicator light
flashes to indicate which turn signal light
is operating (page 5-49).
This light comes on when the ON/OFF
switch is pressed and the cruise control
system is activated.
When operating the hazard warning
lights, both turn signal indicator lights
flash (page 5-53).
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-45
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
Beep Sounds
If an indicator light remains illuminated (does
not flash) or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out.
qSeat Belt Warning Beep
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, a beep sound will be heard
for about 6 seconds.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened and
the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than
about 20 km/h (12 mph), a beep sound
will be heard again for a specified period
of time.
Refer to Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep on
page 5-40.
qIgnition Key Reminder
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
ACC position with the key inserted, a
continuous beep sound will be heard
when the driver's door is opened.
qTire Inflation Pressure Warning
Beepí
The warning beep sound will be heard for
about 3 seconds when there is any
abnormality in tire inflation pressures
(page 5-25).
5-46
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Lighting Control
WARNING
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself:
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself is dangerous. Because the
xenon fusion bulbs require high
voltage, you could receive an electric
shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement
is necessary.
NOTE
If the headlights flicker, or the brightness
weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a
replacement is necessary. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qHeadlights
To turn on the lights, turn the headlight
switch on the end of the control lever.
qHeadlight High-Low Beam
Switch Position
Headlights
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Push the lever forward for high beam.
Pull back to original position for low
beam.
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard
illumination
High beam
NOTE
l
If the light switch is left on, the lights will
automatically switch off 30 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the LOCK
position or removing the key.
Low beam
The lights will automatically switch back on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ACC or ON position.
l
To prevent discharging the battery, don't
leave the lights on while the engine is off
unless safety requires them.
í
Xenon fusion headlight bulbs
The low-beam bulbs of the headlights
have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a
bright white beam over a wide area.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-47
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Select the proper setting from the following chart.
qFlashing the Headlights
Front seat
Rear
seat
Switch
Position
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully
toward you. The headlight switch does
not need to be on, and the lever will return
to the normal position when released.
Load
Driver Passenger
×
×
×
×
×
―
×
―
―
×
―
―
―
×
0
0
1
2
3
×
×
×
―
―
×
×: Yes
―: No
q
Daytime Running Lights (Canada)
In Canada, vehicles must be driven with
the headlights on during daytime
operation.
For that reason, the daytime running lights
automatically turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
qHeadlight Levelingí
The number of passengers and weight of
cargo in the luggage compartment change
the angle of the headlights.
The headlight leveling switch adjusts this
angle.
NOTE
The Daytime Running Lights turn off when the
parking brake is applied.
5-48
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Fog Lightsí
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.
They help you to see as well as to be seen.
qTurn Signal
To turn the front fog lights on, rotate the
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.
fog light switch to the
position.
The headlight switch must be in the
position to turn on the front fog lights.
If the indicator light continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
its original position.
Right turn
Right lane
change
Fog light switch
OFF
Left lane
change
To turn them off, rotate the fog light
switch to the OFF position or turn the
headlight switch to the or OFF
position.
Left turn
Green indicators on the dashboard show
which signal is working.
NOTE
The fog lights will turn off when the headlights
are set at high beam.
Lane-change signals
Move the lever slightly toward the
direction of the change ―until the
indicator flashes― and hold it there. It
will return to the off position when
released.
NOTE
If an indicator light stays on without flashing
or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn
signal bulbs may be burned out.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-49
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
qWindshield Wipers
Windshield Wipers and
Washer
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever
down.
INT ― Intermittent
1 ― Low speed
2 ― High speed
Do not use the washer without first
warming the windshield and never use
plain tap water:
Using windshield washer fluid
without anti-freeze protection in
freezing temperatures is dangerous.
The washer fluid could freeze on the
windshield and block your vision. You
could have an accident.
For a single wiping cycle, push the lever
up to MIST.
MIST ― Mist
Variable-speed intermittent wipers
Set the lever to INT and choose the
interval timing by rotating the ring.
NOTE
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper
blades, the wiper motor is protected from
motor breakdown, overheating and possible
fire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism will
automatically stop operation of the blades, but
only for about 5 minutes.
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch and
park off the right-of-way, and remove the snow
and ice.
INT ring
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and the
blades should operate normally. If they don't
resume functioning, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive to
the side of the road and park off the right-of-
way. Wait until the weather clears before trying
to drive with the wipers inoperative.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
qWindshield Washer
Rear Window Wiper and
Washerí
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
spray washer fluid.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
OFF
qRear Window Wiper
Washer
NOTE
With the wiper lever in the OFF or INT
position, the wipers will operate continuously
until the lever is released.
Turn the wiper on by turning the rear
wiper/washer switch.
ON ― Normal
If the washer doesn't work, inspect the
fluid level (page 8-26). If it's OK, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
INT ― Intermittent
qRear Window Washer
To spray washer fluid, turn the rear wiper/
washer switch to the
position. After
the switch is released, the washer will
stop.
If the washer doesn't work, inspect the
fluid level (page 8-26). If it's OK and the
washer still doesn't work, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-51
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Fully Automatic Type Air-Conditioning
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster clears frost,
fog, and thin ice from the rear window.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
Press the switch to turn on the rear
window defroster. The rear window
defroster operates for about 15 minutes
and turns off automatically.
The indicator light illuminates during
operation.
CAUTION
To turn off the rear window defroster
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press
the switch again.
Don't use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defroster grid inside the window.
Manual Type Air-Conditioning
NOTE
This defroster is not designed for melting snow.
If there is an accumulation of snow on the rear
window, remove it before using the defroster.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Horn
Hazard Warning Flasher
To sound the horn, press the
the steering wheel.
mark on
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all
the turn signals will flash.
NOTE
l
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l
Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
HomeLink Wireless
Control Systemí
WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink system with
any garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature:
Using the HomeLink system with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety standards
is dangerous. (This includes garage
doors manufactured before April 1,
1982.)
NOTE
HomeLink and HomeLink house are registered
trademarks of Johnson Controls.
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3
hand-held transmitters with a single built-
in component in the auto-dimming mirror.
Pressing the HomeLink button on the
auto-dimming mirror activates garage
doors, gates and other devices
Using these garage door openers can
increase the risk of serious injury or
death. For further information,
contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515
or www.homelink.com or your
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
surrounding your home.
Indicator light
Always check the areas surrounding
garage doors and gates for people or
obstructions before programming or
during operation of the HomeLimk
system:
Programming or operating the
HomeLink system without verifying
the safety of areas surrounding
garage doors and gates is dangerous
and could result in an unexpected
accident and serious injury if
someone were to be hit.
HomeLink button
CAUTION
HomeLink has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the device.
5-54
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
NOTE
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL3
CANADA:4112A-OBIHL3
This device complies with FCC rules part 15.
Operation is subject to the following
conditions:
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons
which can be individually selected and
programmed using the transmitters for
current, on-market devices as follows:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons (buttons one and
three) ― releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Do not hold the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat step 1 to program a second and/
or third hand-held transmitter to the
remaining two HomeLink buttons.
1- This device may not cause any harmful
interference and
2- This device must accept any interference
that may be received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
The programming will not be erased even if
the battery is disconnected.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 2.5―7.5 cm (1―3 inches)
away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program while keeping the
indicator light in view.
qPre-programming the HomeLink
System
NOTE
It is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink for
quicker training and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter buttons. Do not release the
buttons until step 4 has been
completed.
NOTE
l
Verify that there is a remote control
Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming
Step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
transmitter available for the device you
would like to program.
Disconnect the power to the device.
l
q
Programming the HomeLink System
4. After the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light, release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
CAUTION
When programming a garage door
opener or a gate, disconnect the
power to these devices before
performing programming, as
continuous operation of the devices
could damage the motor.
NOTE
If the HomeLink indicator light does not
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-
800-355-3515 for assistance.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light.
HomeLink should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.
Do not repeat step 1.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your
device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed and released.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-
800-355-3515.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.
Do not repeat step 1.
qGate operator/Canadian
Programming
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
“Programming” steps 6―8 to complete
the programming of a rolling code
equipped device (most commonly a
garage door opener).
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission ―
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
6. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
by using the “Programming” procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
“Programming HomeLink” step 3 with
the following:
7. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE
NOTE
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device
during the “cycling” process to prevent
possible overheating.
8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release ―
every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-
held transmitter until the frequency signal
has successfully been accepted by
HomeLink. (The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to
complete.
qOperating the HomeLink System
Press the programmed HomeLink button
to operate a programmed device. The
code will continue being transmitted for a
maximum of 20 seconds.
qReprogramming the HomeLink
system
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with
“Programming” - step 2.
qErasing Programmed HomeLink
Buttons
To erase the existing programming from
all three operating channels, press and
hold the two outside buttons (
,
)
on the auto-dimming mirror until the
HomeLink indicator light begins to flash
after approximately 20 seconds.
Verify that the programming has been
erased when you resell the vehicle.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
6
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
Climate Control System ............................................................... 6-2
Operating Tips ........................................................................... 6-2
Vent Operation .......................................................................... 6-3
Types of the Climate Control System ....................................... 6-5
Manual Type ............................................................................. 6-6
Fully Automatic Type ............................................................. 6-10
Audio System ............................................................................... 6-14
Antenna ................................................................................... 6-14
Operating Tips for Audio System ........................................... 6-14
Audio Set ................................................................................ 6-25
Audio Control Switch Operation (Steering Wheel)í ............. 6-42
Safety Certification ................................................................. 6-45
Interior Equipment ..................................................................... 6-46
Sunvisors ................................................................................. 6-46
Interior Lights ......................................................................... 6-46
Information Display ................................................................ 6-49
Cup Holder .............................................................................. 6-51
Bottle Holder ........................................................................... 6-52
Storage Compartments ............................................................ 6-53
Accessory Sockets .................................................................. 6-56
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qParking in Direct Sunlight
Operating Tips
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then run
the climate control system.
qOperating the Climate Control
System
Operate the climate control system with
the engine running.
qNot Using for a Long Period
NOTE
Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes
at least once a month to keep internal
parts lubricated.
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the fan control dial on for a long
period of time with the ignition switch in the
ACC position when the engine is not running.
qCheck the Refrigerant before the
Weather Gets Hot
qClearing the Air Inlet
Have the air conditioner checked before
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant
may make the air conditioner less
efficient. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for refrigerant inspection.
Clear all obstructions like leaves, snow
and ice from the hood and the air inlet in
the cowl grille to improve the system
efficiency.
qFoggy Windows
The air conditioner is filled with
HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that will
not damage the ozone layer.
If the air conditioner is low on refrigerant
or has a malfunction, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The windows may fog up easily in humid
weather. Use the climate control system to
defog the windows.
To help defog the windows, operate the
air conditioner to dehumidify the air.
q
Replacement of the Cabin Air Filter
NOTE
The air conditioner may be used along with the
heater to dehumidify the air.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
filter for the air conditioner, it is necessary
to change the filter periodically as
indicated in scheduled maintenance (page
8-3). Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for replacement of the cabin air
filter.
qOutside/Recirculated Air Position
Use the outside air position in normal
conditions. The recirculated air position
should be used only when driving on
dusty roads or for quick cooling of the
interior.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Vent Operation
2. Rotate the air vent left and right to
adjust the direction of airflow.
qAdjusting the Vents
Directing airflow
1. Press the upper part of the air vent to
open it.
NOTE
When using the air conditioner, mist may come
out from the vents. This is not a sign of trouble
but a result of humid air being suddenly
cooled.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qSelecting the Airflow Mode
Dashboard Vents
Defroster and Floor Vents
Dashboard and Floor Vents
Defroster Vents
Floor Vents
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Types of the Climate Control System
Manual type and fully automatic type climate control systems are explained separately.
Check your vehicle's climate control type and read the appropriate pages.
Manual Type ............................................................................................................ page 6-6
Fully Automatic Type ............................................................................................ page 6-10
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Manual Type
Air intake selector
A/C Switch
Temperature control dial
Fan control dial
Mode selector dial
Fan control dial
qControl Switches
Temperature control dial
Cold
Hot
This dial allows variable fan speeds.
0―Fan off
1―Low speed
2―Medium low speed
3―Medium high speed
4―High speed
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Mode selector dial
This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Press the switch to alternate between the
and
positions. The indicator
light for the selected mode will illuminate.
It is recommended that under normal
conditions the switch be kept in the
outside air position.
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airflow mode (page 6-4).
Outside air position (
)
Outside air is taken into the vehicle. Use
this position for normal ventilation and
heating.
A/C switch
Recirculated air position (
)
Outside air is shut off. Air within the
vehicle is recirculated.
This position can be used when driving on
a dusty road or in similar conditions. It
also helps to provide quicker cooling of
the interior.
Push the A/C switch to turn the air
conditioner on. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate when the fan
control dial is set at position 1, 2, 3, or 4.
WARNING
Do not use the
rainy weather:
Using the
position in cold or
Push the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off.
position in cold or
rainy weather is dangerous as it will
cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when the
outside temperature approaches 0 °C (32 °F).
Air intake selector
qHeating
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
hot position.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
NOTE
l
When maximum cooling is desired, set the
temperature control dial to the extreme cold
position and set the air intake selector to
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
the
position, then set the fan control
dial to position 4.
If warmer air is desired at floor level, set
the mode selector dial at the
and adjust the temperature control dial to
maintain maximum comfort.
The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
NOTE
l
l
l
If the windshield fogs up easily, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
If cooler air is desired at face level, set the
mode selector dial at the position and
position
l
adjust the temperature control dial to
maintain maximum comfort.
l
The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
qVentilation
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
qCooling (With Air Conditioner)
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
cold position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging
5. Adjust the fan control dial and
temperature control dial to maintain
maximum comfort.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
CAUTION
When using the air conditioner while
driving up long hills or in heavy
traffic, closely monitor the
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
temperature gauge (page 5-33).
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the gauge indicates
overheating, turn the air conditioner
off (page 7-14).
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
WARNING
Do not defog the windshield using the
position with the temperature
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
control set to the cold position:
Using the
position with the
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
NOTE
One of the functions of the air conditioner is
dehumidifying the air and, to use this function,
the temperature does not have to be set to cold.
Therefore, set the temperature control dial to
the desired position (hot or cold) and turn on
the air conditioner when you want to
dehumidify the cabin air.
accident. Set the temperature control
to the hot or warm position when
using the
position.
NOTE
l
For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control dial to the extreme hot
position and the fan control dial to position
4.
l
l
If warm air is desired at the floor, set the
mode selector dial to the
position.
In the , or position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
(however, the indicator light does not
illuminate) and the
position is
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield.
In the
or
position, the
position cannot be changed to the
position.
qDehumidifying (With Air
Conditioner)
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
weather to help defog the windshield and
side windows.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
desired position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the
position.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Fully Automatic Type
Climate control information is displayed on the information display.
Temperature control dial
Fan control dial
Air intake selector
A/C switch
OFF switch
Mode selector switch
Auto switch
Windshield defroster switch
l
l
Outside/Recirculated air selection
Air conditioner operation
qControl Switches
AUTO switch
NOTE
AUTO switch indicator light
l
When on, it indicates AUTO operation, and
the system will function automatically.
l
When off, it indicates the operation of other
switches such as the mode selector switch,
fan control dial, A/C switch and windshield
defroster switch. Other functions will
continue to operate automatically.
By pressing the AUTO switch the
following functions will be automatically
controlled in accordance with the set
temperature:
l
Airflow temperature
Amount of airflow
Selection of airflow mode
l
l
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
OFF switch
Mode selector switch
Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the
climate control system.
The desired airflow mode can be selected
(page 6-4).
NOTE
With the airflow mode set to
Temperature control dial
l
position
and the temperature control dial set at a
medium temperature, heated air is directed
to the feet and a comparably lower air
temperature will flow through the central,
left and right vents.
Cold
Hot
l
To set the air vent to
, press the
windshield defroster switch.
A/C switch
This dial controls temperature.Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
Fan control dial
With the AUTO or fan control dial ON,
press the A/C switch to select the air
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying
functions) on or off.
Slow
Fast
The fan has seven speeds. The selected
speed will be displayed.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when the
outside temperature approaches 0 °C (32 °F).
(Indicator remains on even when system is off.)
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Air intake selector
qOperation of Automatic Air
Conditioning
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection of
the airflow mode, air intake selector
and amount of airflow will be
automatically controlled.
Outside or recirculated air positions can
be selected. Press the switch to select
outside/recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position (
)
Use this position when going through
tunnels, driving in congested traffic (high
engine exhaust areas) or when quick
cooling is desired.
2. Use the temperature control dial to
select a desired temperature.
Outside air position (
)
Use this position for normal conditions
and defogging.
Cold
Hot
WARNING
Do not use the
rainy weather:
Using the
position in cold or
To turn off the system, press the OFF
switch.
position in cold or
rainy weather is dangerous as it will
cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
NOTE
l
Setting the temperature to maximum high
or low will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
Windshield defroster switch
l
When selecting heat, the system will restrict
airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold
air from blowing out of the vents.
Press the switch to defrost the windshield
and front door windows.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging
qSunlight/Temperature Sensor
The fully automatic air conditioner
function measures inside and outside
temperatures, and sunlight. It then sets
temperatures inside the passenger
compartment accordingly.
CAUTION
Do not obstruct either sensor,
otherwise the automatic air
conditioner will not operate properly.
Press the windshield defroster switch.
In this position, the position is
automatically selected, and the air
conditioner automatically turns on
(however, the indicator light does not
illuminate). The air conditioner will
directly dehumidify the air to the front
windshield and side windows (page 6-4).
Airflow amount will be increased.
Sunlight sensor
WARNING
Set the temperature control to the hot
or warm position when defogging (
position):
Using the
position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
Interior temperature sensor
NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to increase
the air flow temperature and defog the
windshield more quickly.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Antenna
Operating Tips for Audio
System
qDetachable Type
To remove the antenna, turn it
counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
Make sure the antenna is securely
installed.
WARNING
Do not adjust the audio control
switches while driving the vehicle:
Adjusting the audio while driving the
vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to
a serious accident. Always adjust the
audio while the vehicle is stopped.
Even if the audio control switches are
equipped on the steering wheel, learn
to use the switches without looking
down at them so that you can keep
your maximum attention on the road
while driving the vehicle.
Remove
Install
CAUTION
CAUTION
For the purposes of safe driving,
adjust the audio volume to a level
that allows you to hear sounds
outside of the vehicle.
Ø To prevent damage to the
antenna, remove it before entering
a car wash facility or passing
beneath a low overhead clearance.
Ø Be careful around the antenna
when removing snow from the
roof. Otherwise the antenna could
be damaged.
NOTE
l
Do not use the audio for long periods of
time while the engine is off. Otherwise the
battery could go dead.
l
If a cellular phone or CB radio is used in
or near the vehicle, it could cause noise to
occur from the audio system, however, this
does not indicate that the system has been
damaged.
NOTE
When leaving your vehicle unattended, we
recommend that you remove the antenna and
store it inside the vehicle.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar
to beams of light because they do not
bend around corners, but they do reflect.
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM
stations cannot be received at the great
distances possible with AM reception.
qRadio Reception
AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere. Therefore, they can reach
longer distances than FM signals. Because
of this, two stations may sometimes be
picked up on the same frequency at the
same time.
Ionosphere
FM wave
AM wave
Ionosphere
FM wave
100—200 km (60—120 miles)
Atmospheric conditions can also affect
FM reception. High humidity will cause
poor reception. However, cloudy days
may provide better reception than clear
days.
Station 1
Station 2
FM characteristics
An FM broadcast range is usually about
40―50 km (25―30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the reflected signal at
the same time. This causes a slight delay
in reception and may be heard as a broken
sound or a distortion. This problem may
also be encountered when in close
FM Station
proximity to the transmitter.
40—50km
(25—30 miles)
Reflected wave
Direct
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Flutter/Skip noise
Strong signal noise
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
straight lines and become weak in valleys
between tall buildings, mountains, and
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
through such an area, the reception
conditions may change suddenly, resulting
in annoying noise.
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are
extremely strong, so the result is noise and
sound breakup at the radio receiver.
Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Weak signal noise
In suburban areas, broadcast signals
become weak because of distance from
the transmitter. Reception in such fringe
areas is characterized by sound breakup.
Station 2
Station 1
88.1 MHz
88.3 MHz
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
If the cassette tape is loose, it may
produce poor sound or performance
during playback. Use a pencil or
qOperating Tips for Cassette Tape
Player
Cleaning the cassette tape player
something similar to remove any slack.
The tape head, capstans, and pinch rollers
will gather oxide residue from cassette
tapes. This can cause weak or wavering
sounds and damage to the cassette tapes
and player. Use a good quality head-
cleaning tape or a liquid cleaner cassette
tape to remove it.
Should the unit not operate normally,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Never attempt to repair it or insert a
screwdriver or anything else.
l
l
Only cassette tapes that play no longer
than 90 minutes should be used.
Cassette tape exceeding 90 minutes are
thin and may easily break.
Do not leave a cassette tape in the tape
player slot when not in use. Remove it
completely to permit the slot door to
close and to protect the mechanism
from dust.
Store cassette tapes away from extreme
heat, magnetic fields, and direct
sunlight. Protect the exposed cassette
tape from dirt and damage. Store
cassette tapes in their original cases or
other protective cases.
Handling the cassette tape player
The following precautions should be
observed.
l
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
l
l
Do not insert any objects, other than
cassette tape, into the slot.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
The CD revolves at high speed within
the unit. Defective (cracked or badly
bent) CDs should never be used.
qOperating Tips for CD Player/In-
Dash CD Changer
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or
optical components (prism and lens) in the
CD player/In-dash CD changer may
become clouded with condensation. At
this time, the CD will eject immediately
when placed in the unit. A clouded CD
can be corrected simply by wiping it with
a soft cloth. Clouded optical components
will clear naturally in about an hour. Wait
for normal operation to return before
attempting to use the unit.
l
Do not use non-conventional discs
such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs,
etc. The disc may not eject resulting in
a malfunction.
Handling the CD player/In-dash CD
changer
The following precautions should be
observed.
l
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
l
If the memory portion of the CD is
transparent or translucent, do not use
the disc.
l
Do not insert any objects, other than
CDs, into the slot.
Transparent
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
A new CD may have rough edges on
its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc
with rough edges is used, proper
setting will not be possible and the CD
player/In-dash CD changer will not
play the CD. In addition, the disc may
not eject resulting in a malfunction.
Remove the rough edges in advance by
using a ball-point pen or pencil as
shown below. To remove the rough
edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil
against the inner and outer perimeter of
the CD.
CD Player
In-dash CD changer
l
Be sure never to touch the signal
surface when handling the CDs. Pick
up a CD by grasping the outer edge or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
l
When driving over uneven surfaces,
the sound may jump.
l
l
Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label). The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can
decrease the amount of light reflected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should
become soiled, gently wipe it with a
soft cloth from the center of the CD to
the edge.
l
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer has
been designed to play CDs bearing the
identification logo as shown. No other
discs can be played.
Use discs that have been legitimately
produced. If illegally-copied discs such
as pirated discs are used, the system
may not operate properly.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
Do not use record sprays, antistatic
Handling the In-dash CD changer
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
the CD and must not be used. Anything
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
should never be used to clean CDs.
Insert discs one by one. If two discs are
inserted at the same time, the system
may not operate properly.
l
This unit may not be able to play
certain CD-R/CD-RWs made using a
computer or music CD recorder due to
disc characteristics, scratches,
smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust or
condensation on the lens inside the
unit.
l
l
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to
direct sunlight or high temperature may
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make
them unplayable.
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB
cannot be played.
l
CD TEXT textual information cannot
be displayed by audio units other than
the In-dash CD changer (MP3
compatible type only). (Only playback
is possible.)
The following player can play MP3
files recorded in CD-ROM, CD-R, and
CD-RW.
· In-dash CD changer (MP3
compatible type only)
The CD player/In-dash CD changer
ejects the CD if the CD is inserted
upside down. Also dirty and/or
defective CDs may be ejected.
An 8 cm (3 in) CD cannot be played in
the CD player even if an 8 cm (3 in)
CD adapter is used.
The In-dash CD changer is specially
made for 12 cm (5 in) CDs.
An 8 cm (3 in) CD can be played in the
In-dash CD changer if an 8 cm (3 in)
CD adapter is used.
If an 8 cm (3 in) CD adapter is not
used, the In-dash CD changer may be
damaged. Always use a CD adapter.
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player/In-dash CD changer.
l
l
This unit may not be able to play
l
certain discs made using a computer
due to the application (writing
software) setting used. (For details,
consult the store where the application
was purchased.)
l
l
It is possible that certain text data, such
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW
may not be displayed when musical
data (CD-DA) is playing.
The period from when a CD-RW is
inserted to when it begins playing is
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.
Completely read the instruction manual
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.
Do not use discs with cellophane tape
adhering, partially peeled off labels, or
adhesive material exuding from the
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use
discs with a commercially-available
CD-R label affixed. The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
seal affixed to it.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3 files, playback of the two file
types differs depending on how the
disc was recorded.
Packet written discs cannot be played
on this unit.
This unit does not play CDs recorded
using MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3
PRO and RIFF MP3 formats.
qOperating tips for MP3
NOTE
Supply of this product only conveys a license
for private, non-commercial use and does not
convey a license nor imply any right to use this
product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-
generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media),
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such as
pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.
An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit http://
www.mp3licensing.com.
l
l
l
This audio system handles MP3 files
that have been recorded on CD-R/CD-
RW/CD-ROMs. Discs that have been
recorded using the following formats
can be played:
l
ISO 9660 level 1
ISO 9660 level 2
Joliet extended format
Romeo extended format
l
l
l
l
This unit handles MP3 files
conforming to the MP3 format
containing both header frames and data
frames.
l
This unit can play multi-session
recorded discs that have up to 40
sessions.
This unit can play MP3s with sampling
l
frequencies of 16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
kHz.
This unit can play MP3 files that have
l
been recorded in bit rates of 8 kbps to
320 kbps. Nonetheless, to insure
enjoyment of music with consistent
sound quality, it is recommended to use
discs that have been recorded at a bit
rate of 128 kbps or more.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
l
About folders and files
MP3 files not conforming to the MP3
format containing both header frames
and data frames will be skipped and
not played.
This unit will play MP3 files that have
up to eight levels. However, the more
levels a disc has, the longer it will take
to initially start playing. It is
recommended to record discs with two
levels or less.
A single disc with up to 512 files can
be played and a single folder with up to
255 files can be played.
When naming an MP3 file, be sure to
add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after
the file name.
The maximum number of characters
that can be used for file names is as
follows. However, this unit will only
display up to 30 characters, including
the file extension (.mp3).
l
The order of hierarchy for MP3 files
and folders during playback or other
functions is from shallow to deep. The
arrangement and playing order of a
recorded disc containing MP3 files is
as follows:
l
File number
A numerical file number is assigned
to each file in a folder in the order of
hierarchy from shallow to deep.
l
l
l
l
Folder number
A numerical folder number is
assigned to each folder in the order
of hierarchy from shallow to deep.
Folder
No.
01
02
04
3
Maximum number of
characters in a file name
(including a separator “.”
and the three letters of the
file extension)
03
2
ISO9660 level 1
ISO9660 level 2
12*
31*
05
4
Joliet extended
format
64
06
Romeo extended
format
128
5
1
* English one-byte characters (capitalized only) and
underbar “_” are available.
CAUTION
Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4
This unit can only play MP3 files that
have an MP3 file extension (.mp3)
attached. Do not attach an MP3 file
extension to any other type file as it
could cause noise to be emitted or a
malfunction in the unit.
l
The folder order is automatically
assigned and this order cannot be
optionally set.
Any folder without an MP3 file will be
ignored. (It will be skipped and the
folder number will not be displayed.)
l
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
About ID3 Tag display
Sampling
l
This unit can only display ID3 Tag
Refers to the process of encoding analog
audio data at regular intervals and
converting it to digital data. The sampling
rate refers to the number of times a
sample is taken in one second and is
expressed in Hz units. Increasing the
sampling rate improves the sound quality
but also increases the data size.
album, track and artist names that have
been input using Ver.1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3
formats. Any other data that may have
been input cannot be displayed.
l
This unit can only display English
(including numerals) one-byte
characters. Use only English (including
numerals) one-byte characters when
inputting ID3 tags. Two-byte characters
and some special symbols cannot be
displayed.
Bit rate
Refers to the volume of data per second,
expressed in bps (bits per second).
Generally, the larger the number of the
transfer bit rate when compressing an
MP3 file, the more information regarding
musical reproduction it carries, and
therefore the better the sound quality.
Specialized glossary
MP3
Abbreviation for “MPEG Audio Layer 3”.
A technical standard for audio
compression as decided by an ISO
(International Organization for
Standardization) MPEG working group.
Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be
compressed to approximately a tenth of
the source data size.
Packet writing
A general term for the method, similar to
that used for floppy discs or hard drives,
of recording the required file in a single
increment on a CD-R and similar.
ID3 Tag
ISO 9660
ID3 tag is a method for storing
An international standard for logical
formatting of CD-ROM files and folders.
It is divided into three separate levels
based on differences in file naming
procedures, data configuration and other
characteristics.
information related to the music in an
MP3 file. Information such as track, artist
and album name can be stored. This
content can be freely edited using ID3
editing function software.
VBR
Multi-session
Abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate. While
CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is generally
used, VBR varies the bit rate for audio
compression according to compression
conditions and this allows for
A session is the complete amount of data
recorded from the beginning to the end of
a single period of CD-ROM, CD-R/CD-
RW data recording. Multi-session refers to
the existence of data from two or more
sessions on a single disc.
compression with preference given to
sound quality.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Audio Set
l
l
Audio information is displayed on the information display.
There are two types of In-dash CD changers. Check which In-dash CD changer your
vehicle is equipped with.
In-Dash CD Changer (non-MP3 compatible)
CD Player
In-dash CD Changer (MP3 compatible)
Illustration is of a representative audio unit.
Cassette Tape Player
Power/Volume/Sound Controls .............................................................................. page 6-26
Operating the Radio ............................................................................................... page 6-28
Operating the Cassette Tape Player ........................................................................ page 6-32
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .............................................................. page 6-34
Operating the In-Dash CD Changer ....................................................................... page 6-36
Error Indications ..................................................................................................... page 6-41
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qPower/Volume/Sound Controls
Power/Volume dial
Audio control dial
Power ON/OFF
Audio sound adjustment
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position.
1. Press the audio control dial to select the
function. The selected function will be
indicated.
Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
*
Press the power/volume dial again to turn
the audio system off.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the audio system on for a long
period of time when the engine is not running.
*
Volume adjustment
*
Depending on the mode selected, the
indication changes.
To adjust the volume, turn the power/
volume dial.
Turn the power/volume dial to the right to
increase volume, to the left to decrease it.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the
selected functions as follows:
Turn the audio control dial to select ALC
OFF or ALC LEVEL1―3 modes. The
selected mode will be indicated.
Indication
Turn Left Turn Right
Select mode
Decrease
bass
Increase
bass
Decrease
treble
Increase
treble
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
front
rear
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
left
right
OFF
ON
BEEP setting
The beep-sound when operating the audio
system can be set on or off.
NOTE
About 5 seconds after selecting any mode, the
volume function will be automatically selected.
To reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press
the audio control dial for 2 seconds. The unit
will beep and “CLEAR” will be displayed.
Automatic Level Control (ALC)
The automatic level control is a feature
that automatically adjusts audio volume
and sound quality according to the vehicle
speed.
The volume increases in accordance with
the increase in vehicle speed, and
decreases as vehicle speed decreases.
The following four modes are available.
Select the desired mode.
Mode
Volume change
No change
Minimum
Medium
Maximum
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Radio
Band selector buttons
Satellite button
Scan button
Seek tuning
button
Auto memory
button/Electric
serial number
button
Channel preset buttons
Manual tuning dial
Radio ON
Tuning
Press a band selector button (
to turn the radio on.
,
)
The radio has the following tuning
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The
easiest way to tune stations is to set them
on preset channels.
Band selection
Choose AM by pressing the AM button
) and FM by pressing the FM1/2
button ( ).
(
NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows
or the battery is disconnected), the preset
channels will be canceled.
The selected mode will be indicated. If
FM stereo is being received, “ST” will be
displayed.
Manual tuning
NOTE
Turning the manual tuning dial will
change the frequency higher or lower.
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,
reception automatically changes from
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise, and the
“ST” indicator will go out.
Seek tuning
Pressing the seek tuning button (
,
)
will cause the tuner to seek a higher or
lower frequency automatically.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
Press and hold the auto memory button
If you continue to press and hold the button,
the frequency will continue changing without
stopping.
(
) for about 2 seconds until a beep
sound is heard; the system will
automatically scan and temporarily store
up to 6 stations with the strongest
frequencies in each selected band in that
area.
Scan tuning
Press the scan button (
) to
automatically sample strong stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about 5
seconds. To hold a station, press the scan
After scanning is completed, the station
with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed.
button (
) again during this interval.
Press and release the auto memory button
Preset channel tuning
(
) to recall stations from the auto-
stored stations. One stored station will be
selected each time; its frequency and
channel number will be displayed.
The 6 preset channels can be used to store
6 AM and 12 FM stations.
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.
NOTE
If no stations can be tuned after scanning
operations, “A” will be displayed.
2. Depress a channel preset button for
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is
heard. The preset channel number and
station frequency will be displayed.
The station is now held in the memory.
SATELLITE RADIO (SAT)
Vehicles equipped with the separately
purchased SIRIUS digital satellite radio
unit have the ability to receive channels of
digital quality programming coast to coast
via satellite. For information on use, read
the Satellite Radio Kit manual
accompanying the SIRIUS digital satellite
radio unit. A subscription to SIRIUS
digital satellite radio service is required
(available in the U.S. - Except Alaska and
Hawaii) to enable this feature once the
separately purchased SIRIUS digital
satellite radio unit has been installed. For
subscription and channel information, or
for digital satellite radio technical issues,
contact SIRIUS directly at:
3. Repeat this operation for the other
stations and bands you want to store.
To tune one in the memory, select AM,
FM1, or FM2 and then press its
channel preset button. The station
frequency and the channel number will
be displayed.
NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows
or the battery is disconnected), the preset
channels will be canceled.
Auto memory tuning
This is especially useful when driving in
an area where the local stations are not
known. Additional AM/FM stations can
be stored without disturbing the
- Web: www.siriusradio.com
- Phone (24 hrs/day, 7 days/week): 888-
539-SIRI (7474)
- E-mail: [email protected]
- Mailing Address: Sirius Satellite Radio
previously set channels.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
1221 Avenue Of The Americas
New York, NY 10020
Attention: Customer Care
Include your Sirius Radio ESN
(Electronic Serial Number) when
subscribing or requesting technical
assistance. See the Satellite Radio Kit
manual accompanying the SIRIUS unit
for complete satellite radio activation
procedures and information on how to
display the ESN#.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Cassette Tape Playerí
Cassette tape play button
Fast-forward button
APC button:
(next program)
(one being
played)
Rewind
button
Cassette tape eject button
Repeat button
Program button
Dolby NR button
Cassette tape insert
Dolby noise reduction
Insert the cassette tape into the slot, open
edge to the right and cassette tape will
begin play, and “TAPE PLAY” will be
displayed. At the end of the cassette tape,
the unit automatically reverses cassette
When using a tape with Dolby NR*, push
the Dolby NR button ( ). The
symbol will be displayed. To play a tape
without Dolby NR, push the button once
again.
tape play. When
is lit, the cassette
tape's top side is playing. When
the bottom side is on.
is lit,
* Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Playback
Press the cassette tape play button
(
) to start play when a cassette tape
is in the unit. If a cassette tape is not in the
unit when the cassette tape play button
Ejecting the cassette tape
(
) is pressed, “NO TAPE” will
Press the cassette tape eject button ( ) to
eject the cassette tape.
flash on and off.
NOTE
The cassette tape can be ejected when the
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
6-32
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Fast-forward/Rewind
Press the repeat button (
) during
playback. The current selection playing
will be repeated (“RPT” will be
displayed).
Press the fast-forward button (
fast-forward.
Press the rewind button (
To stop this operation and play the
cassette tape, press the button again.
) to
) to rewind.
Press the repeat button (
to cancel repeat playback.
) once again
NOTE
NOTE
RPT may not operate properly if:
When the cassette tape ends during fast-
forward or rewind, it automatically stops and
starts playing.
l
A tape was recorded at a low level.
l
A tape has long, silent intervals.
l
A tape is a live recording.
l
A tape has very short intervals of less than
3 seconds.
Reversing
Press the program button (
) to
change cassette tape-play direction.
NOTE
When the cassette tape ends, the unit
automatically reverses play.
Automatic program control (APC)
APC is used to find the beginning of
either the next program or the one being
played.
Press the APC button ( ) to the
beginning of the next selection.
Press the APC button ( ) to the
beginning of the one being played. To
stop this operation and play the cassette
tape, press the button again.
NOTE
APC may not operate properly if:
l
A tape was recorded at a low level.
l
A tape has long, silent intervals.
l
A tape is a live recording.
l
A tape has very short intervals of less than
3 seconds.
Repeat playback
This operation makes it possible to listen
to a selection repeatedly.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Playerí
Fast-forward button
CD eject button
CD play button
Load button
CD slot
Track up
button
Scan
button
Track down
button
Reverse
button
Repeat button
Random button
Type
Playable data
· Music data (CD-DA)
NOTE
When the load button (
CD will load and play even if the CD eject
button ( ) had been previously pressed.
) is pressed, the
Music CD player
(non-MP3 compatible)
Inserting the CD
Fast-forward/Reverse
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play. There will be a short
lapse before play begins while the player
reads the digital signals on the CD.
Press and hold the fast-forward button
(
) to advance through a track at high
speed.
Press and hold the reverse button (
)
to reverse through a track at high speed.
Ejecting the CD
Track search
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
Press the track up button ( ) once to
skip forward to the beginning of the next
track.
Press the track down button ( ) once to
skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
Playback
Press the CD play button ( ) to start
play when a CD is in the unit.
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”
will flash on and off.
6-34
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Music scan
This feature helps to find a program by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.
Press the scan button (
,
) during
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash).
Press the scan button (
cancel scan playback.
,
) again to
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
This feature makes it possible to listen to
a selection repeatedly.
Press the repeat button (
) during
playback. The current selection will be
repeated (“RPT” will be displayed).
Press the repeat button (
to cancel repeat playback.
) once again
Random playback
This feature allows the CD player to
randomly select the order of the songs.
Press the random button (
) during
playback. The next selection will be
randomly selected (“RDM” will be
displayed).
Press the random button (
) once
again to cancel random playback.
Message display
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert. If the message
appears again, take the unit to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the In-Dash CD Changerí
Music CD player (non-MP3 compatible)
Music CD/MP3 CD player (MP3 compatible)
CD slot
CD play button
CD eject button
Load button
Channel preset buttons
Scan
button
Track up
button
Track down
button
Display
feed dial
Disc
down/Folder
down button
Fast-forward
button
Repeat button
Reverse button
Disc up/Folder up button
Random button
There are two types of In-dash CD
changers. Check which In-dash CD
changer your vehicle is equipped with.
Inserting the CD
The CD must be label-side up when
inserting. The auto-loading mechanism
will set the CD and begin play. There will
be a short lapse before play begins while
the player reads the digital signals on the
CD.
Type
Playable data
Music CD player
(non-MP3 compatible)
· Music data (CD-DA)
Music CD/MP3 CD
player
(MP3 compatible)
· Music data (CD-DA)
· MP3 file
The disc number and the track number
will be displayed.
NOTE
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and
MP3 files, playback of the two file types differs
depending on how the disc was recorded.
The CD will begin playback automatically
after insertion.
A CD cannot be inserted while the display
reads “WAIT”. A beeping sound can be heard
during this waiting time. Simultaneously
pressing the power/volume dial and the load
button (
) for about 2 seconds will turn
this beeping sound ON or OFF.
6-36
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Normal insertion
NOTE
When the CD is ejected during play, the next
CD will be played automatically.
1. Press the load button (
).
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
Ejecting CDs from desired tray number
Inserting CDs into desired tray number
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
)
1. Press and hold the load button (
)
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.
2. Press the channel preset button for the
desired tray number while “WAIT” is
displayed.
2. Press the channel preset button for the
desired CD number for less than 5
seconds after the beep sound is heard.
3. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
3. Pull out the CD.
NOTE
Multiple ejection
The CD cannot be inserted to the desired tray
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
)
number if the number is already occupied.
Multiple insertion
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.
1. Press and hold the load button (
)
2. Press the CD eject button ( ) again
for less than 5 seconds after the beep
sound is heard.
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
NOTE
3. When “IN” is displayed again, insert
the next CD.
If the button is not pressed and about 5
seconds have elapsed while “DISC OUT” is
flashing, CDs are automatically ejected.
NOTE
The first-inserted CD will be played
automatically when:
3. Pull out the CD, then the next CD will
be ejected.
l
No other CD is inserted within 15 seconds
after “IN” is displayed.
The CD trays are full.
NOTE
l
l
CDs will be ejected starting with the one
with the lowest number.
All CDs in the tray will be ejected
continuously.
CDs can be ejected when the ignition
switch is off. Press and hold the CD eject
button ( ) for about 2 seconds and all
CDs will eject.
Ejecting the CD
Normal ejection
l
l
1. Press the CD eject button ( ). The
disc number and “DISC OUT” will be
displayed.
2. Pull out the CD.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Playback
Press the scan button (
,
) during
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash).
Press the CD play button ( ) to start
play when a CD is in the unit.
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”
will flash on and off.
Press the scan button (
cancel scan playback.
,
) again to
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button
(
) to advance through a track at high
Repeat playback
speed.
During music CD playback
Press and hold the reverse button (
)
to reverse through a track at high speed.
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “RPT” is displayed.
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) once to
skip forward to the beginning of the next
track.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Press the track down button ( ) once to
skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
During MP3 CD playback
(Track repeat)
1. Press the repeat button (
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “RPT” is displayed.
) during
Disc search
During music CD playback
To change the disc, press the DISC button
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
(
or
) during playback.
During MP3 CD playback
(Folder repeat)
To change the disc, press the DISC button
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
(
or
) for 1.5 seconds or
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“RPT” is displayed.
more during playback.
Folder search (during MP3 CD
playback)
To change to the previous folder, press the
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
folder down button (
1.5 seconds, or press the folder up button
) for less than 1.5 seconds to
) for less than
Random playback
(
advance to the next folder.
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
Music scan
This feature helps to find a program by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
During music CD playback
Music CD
1. Press the random button (
playback to play the tracks in the CD
randomly. “RDM” is displayed.
) during
Track number/Elapsed
time display
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Disc tray number
File name display
Album name display
Artist name display
During MP3 CD playback
(Folder random)
1. Press the random button (
) during
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. “RDM” is displayed.
MP3 CD
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
(CD random)
Disc number/File
number/Elapsed time
1. Press the random button (
) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks on the CD randomly. “RDM” is
displayed.
Disc tray number
Folder number/Track
number
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Track name
Folder name
Switching the display (MP3 compatible
type)
Album name (ID3 Tag)
Song name (ID3 Tag)
Artist name (ID3 Tag)
Each time the display button (
) is
pressed during playback, the display will
switch in the following order.
NOTE
(MP3 CD)
This unit can only read English (including
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on
the CD writing software used, proper display
may not be possible.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Display scroll (MP3 compatible type)
Only 12 characters can be displayed at
one time. To display the rest of the
characters of a long title, turn the display
feed dial (
) to the right. Hidden
titles can be scrolled into the display one
character at a time.
NOTE
The displayable number of characters is
limited. If the number of characters, including
the file extension (.mp3), exceeds 32
characters, it may not be fully displayed.
Message display
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert. If the message
appears again, take the unit to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qError Indications
If you see an error indication on the display, find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication
Cause
Solution
Insert the CD properly. If the error indication
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer
CD is inserted upside down
CHECK CD
Insert another CD properly. If the error indication
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer
CD is defective
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
With navigation system
Use the VOICE button for navigation
system sound operation.
For details, refer to
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.
Audio Control Switch
Operation (Steering Wheel)í
When the audio unit is turned on,
operation of the audio unit from the
steering wheel is possible.
NOTE
Because the audio unit will be turned off under
the following conditions, the switches will be
inoperable.
l
When the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position.
l
When the power button on the audio unit is
pressed and the audio unit is turned off.
When the CD being played is ejected and
VOICE button
l
the audio unit is turned off.
NOTE
Without navigation system
l
The VOICE button is operable with the
audio unit turned off.
l
Mazda has installed this system to prevent
distraction while driving the vehicle and
using audio controls on the dashboard.
Always make safe driving your first priority.
qAdjusting the Volume
To increase the volume, press the volume
button ( ).
To decrease the volume, press the volume
button ( ).
6-42
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qChanging the Source
qSeek Switch
Press the mode switch (
) to change
the audio source (FM1 radio> FM2 radio>
AM radio> CD player or CD changer>
Cassette tape player> SIRIUS1>
SIRIUS2> SIRIUS3> cyclical).
When listening to the radio
Press the seek switch (
,
), the radio
switches to the next/previous stored
station in the order that it was stored
(1―6).
NOTE
Press the seek switch (
,
) for about 2
Cassette tape, CD, CD changer, and SIRIUS
digital satellite radio modes cannot be selected
in the following cases:
· A cassette deck, CD, CD changer, or SIRIUS
digital satellite radio unit is not equipped on
the audio system.
seconds until a beep sound is heard to
seek all usable stations at a higher or
lower frequency whether programmed or
not.
When playing a cassette tape
· A cassette tape, or CD has not been inserted.
Press the seek switch ( ), release, and it
will advance to the next selection.
Press the seek switch ( ), release, and it
will repeat the selection being played.
When playing a CD
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip to the
next track.
Press the seek switch ( ) to repeat the
current track.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qMute Switch
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute
audio, press it again to resume audio
output.
NOTE
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position with the audio muted, the mute will be
canceled.
Therefore, when the engine is restarted, the
audio is not muted. To mute the audio again,
press the mute switch ( ).
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Safety Certification
This CD player is made and tested to meet exacting safety standards. It meets FCC
requirements and complies with safety performance standards of the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services.
CAUTION
Ø This CD player should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except qualified
service personnel.
If servicing is required, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure. Never operate the CD
player with the top case of the unit removed.
Ø Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
NOTE
For CD player section:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Sunvisors
Interior Lights
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for
use in front or swing it to the side.
qIlluminated Entry System
When the illuminated entry system
operates, the overhead light (switch is in
the DOOR position) and the courtesy
lights turn on for:
Sunvisor
l
About 30 seconds after the driver's
door is unlocked and the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position (with
the ignition key removed).
l
About 15 seconds after all doors are
closed.
l
About 15 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position (with
the ignition key removed) with all
doors closed.
qVanity Mirrors
To use the vanity mirror, lower the
sunvisor.
The vanity mirror light will illuminate
when you open the cover.
The light also turns off when:
The ignition switch is turned to the ON
l
position and all doors are closed.
The driver's door is locked.
l
NOTE
Battery saver
If any door is left opened, the light goes out
after about 30 minutes to save the battery.
The light turns on again when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, or when
any door is opened after all doors have been
closed.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qOverhead Lights
qMap Lights
Front
The map lights are switched on or off by
pressing the switches.
Front
Switch
Position
Front Overhead Lights
Light off
Rear
l
Light is on when any door is
open
l
Light is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is on
Rear
Switch
Position
Rear Overhead Lights
Light off
Light is on when any door is open
Light is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is on
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qLuggage Compartment Light
qCourtesy Lights
5-Door
Turns on when any door is open or the
illuminated entry system is on.
Courtesy light
Switch
Luggage Compartment Light
Position
Light off
Light on when the hatch is open
Sport Wagon
Switch
Luggage Compartment Light
Position
Light off
Light on when the liftgate is open
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Information Display
OPEN/CLOSE switch (with navigation system)
AMB switch (with outside temperature display )
TILT switch (with navigation system)
CLOCK/CLK switch
SET switch
qInformation Display Functions
The information display has the following functions:
l
Clock
l
Ambient Temperature Display (Outside Temperature Display)
Climate Control Display
Audio Display
l
l
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Time resetting
qClock
While the clock is displayed, press the
SET switch 1.5 seconds or more. When
the switch is released, a beep will sound
and the clock will be reset as follows:
(Example)
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the time is displayed.
12:01―12:29→12:00
12:30―12:59→1:00
NOTE
When the SET switch is released, the seconds
are reset to “00”.
qAmbient Temperature Display
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, press the AMB switch to display
the ambient temperature.
Time setting
1. Press the CLOCK/CLK switch until a
beep sounds, and “12Hr” and “24Hr”
will be displayed.
2. Press the SET switch to switch between
“12Hr” and “24Hr” displays. The
selected display will flash.
To select the desired clock setting,
press the CLOCK/CLK switch again
while the preferred setting is flashing.
3. “Hr. ADJUST” will be displayed next,
and the hour portion of the display will
flash. Press the SET switch to set the
hour, then press the CLOCK/CLK
switch.
4. “Min. ADJUST” will be displayed
next, and the minutes portion of the
display will flash. Press the SET switch
to set the minutes, then press the
CLOCK/CLK switch.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
NOTE
Cup Holder
l
Under the following conditions, the ambient
temperature display may differ from the
actual ambient temperature depending on
the surroundings and vehicle conditions:
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids
while the vehicle is moving is
l
Significantly cold or hot temperatures.
Sudden changes in ambient temperature.
The vehicle is parked.
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.
l
l
l
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
l
l
Press the AMB switch a few seconds or
more to switch the display from Fahrenheit
to Centigrade or vice versa.
(With fully automatic climate control
system)
Press the AMB switch again to switch the
display from ambient temperature to the
temperature set for the air conditioner.
Do not put anything other than cups or
drink cans in cup holders:
Putting objects other than cups or
drink cans in a cup holder is
dangerous.
During sudden braking or
maneuvering, occupants could be hit
and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink cans.
qClimate Control Display
The climate control system status is
displayed. To operate the climate control
system, refer to “Climate Control System”
(page 6-2).
CAUTION
To reduce the possibility of injury in
an accident or a sudden stop, keep
cup holders closed when not in use.
qAudio Display
The audio system status is displayed. To
operate the audio system, refer to
“Audio System” (page 6-14).
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qFront
Bottle Holder
To use the cup holder, open the center
console by pressing the lower center part
of its cover.
Bottle holders are on the inside of the
front doors.
Bottle holder
CAUTION
qRear
Do not use the bottle holders for
containers without caps. The
contents may spill when the door is
opened or closed.
The rear cup holder is on the rear center
armrest.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qStorage Pocket
Storage Compartments
To open, push the release catch down and
pull the lid downward.
WARNING
Keep storage boxes closed when
driving:
Driving with the storage boxes open
is dangerous. To reduce the
possibility of injury in an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the storage
boxes closed when driving.
CAUTION
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in
the storage boxes while parked under
the sun. A lighter could explode or
the plastic material in eyeglasses
could deform and crack from high
temperature.
qCenter Box with Lid (Without
Navigation System)
To use, pull the knob, and the lid opens
automatically.
qOverhead Console
Knob
This console box is designed to store
eyeglasses or other accessories.
Push and release to open.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Small items can be placed in the tray of
the center console lid.
To open it, pull the upper release latch.
qGlove Box
To open the glove box, pull the latch
toward you.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to
lock, counterclockwise to unlock.
Unlock
Lock
q
Storage Box (5-Door/Sport Wagon)
To open, turn the knobs and remove the
cover.
Luggage compartment, right side
qCenter Console
To open, pull the lower release latch.
Knob
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Luggage compartment, left side
Sport Wagon
Knob
qCargo Securing Loops (5-Door/
Sport Wagon)
qCargo Sub-Compartment (Sport
Wagon)
To use the cargo sub-compartment,
remove trunk board A and open trunk
board B.
WARNING
Make sure luggage and cargo is
secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
Trunk board B
Use the loops in the luggage compartment
to secure cargo with a rope or net. The
tensile strength of the loops is 196 N (20
kgf, 44 lbf). Do not apply excessive force
to the loops as it will damage them.
5-Door
Trunk
board A
Cargo sub-
compartment
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Accessory Sockets
CAUTION
To prevent accessory socket damage
or electrical failure, pay attention to
the following:
Ø Do not use accessories that require
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
Ø Do not use accessories that are not
genuine Mazda accessories or the
equivalent.
The ignition switch must be in the ACC
or ON position.
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or
the equivalent requiring no greater than
120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
Front
Ø Close the cover when the accessory
socket is not in use to prevent
foreign objects and liquids from
getting into the accessory socket.
Ø Correctly insert the plug into the
accessory socket.
NOTE
To prevent discharging of the battery, do not
use the socket for long periods with the engine
off or idling.
Rear
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
7
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.
Parking in an Emergency ............................................................. 7-2
Parking in an Emergency .......................................................... 7-2
Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3
Spare Tire and Tool Storage ...................................................... 7-3
Changing a Flat Tire ................................................................. 7-8
Overheating ................................................................................. 7-14
Overheating ............................................................................. 7-14
Emergency Starting .................................................................... 7-16
Starting a Flooded Engine ....................................................... 7-16
Jump-Starting .......................................................................... 7-17
Push-Starting ........................................................................... 7-19
Emergency Towing ..................................................................... 7-20
Towing Description ................................................................. 7-20
Recreational Towing ............................................................... 7-21
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all
the turn signals will flash.
NOTE
l
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l
Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
Spare Tire and Tool Storage
Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
Sedan/5-door
Spare tire
Jack
With sub-woofer
Tire hold-down bolt
(Gold)
Sedan
5-door
Lug wrench
Sport Wagon
Lug wrench
Jack
Spare tire
With sub-woofer
Tire hold-down bolt (Gold)
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
(5-Door/Sport Wagon)
qJack
1. Turn the knob and remove the cover.
To remove the jack
(Sedan)
1. Remove the jack container lid.
2. Remove the jack container lid.
2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw
counterclockwise.
Wing bolt
3. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw
counterclockwise.
Jack screw
Wing bolt
Jack screw
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
To secure the jack
WARNING
1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with
the jack screw pointing front and turn
the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily
tighten it.
Do not install the temporary spare tire
on the front wheels (driving wheels):
Driving with the temporary spare tire
on one of the front driving wheels is
dangerous. Handling will be affected.
You could lose control of the vehicle,
especially on ice or snow bound
roads, and have an accident. Move a
regular tire to the front wheel and
install the temporary spare tire to the
rear.
2. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the figure.
Wing bolt
CAUTION
Ø When using the temporary spare
tire, driving stability may decrease
compared to when using only the
conventional tire. Drive carefully.
Ø To avoid damage to the temporary
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe
the following precautions:
Jack screw
3. Turn the wing bolt completely to
secure the jack.
Ø
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50
mph).
NOTE
If the jack is not completely secured, it could
rattle while driving. Make sure the jack screw
is sufficiently tightened.
Ø
Avoid driving over obstacles.
Also, do not drive through an
automatic car wash. This tire's
diameter is smaller than a
conventional tire, so the ground
clearance is reduced about
35 mm (1.4 in).
qSpare Tire
Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.
The temporary spare tire is lighter and
smaller than a conventional tire, and is
designed only for emergency use and
should be used only for VERY short
periods. Temporary spare tires should
NEVER be used for long drives or
extended periods.
Ø
Ø
Do not use tire chains on any
type of tire, including the spare
tire.
Do not use your temporary
spare tire on any other vehicle,
it has been designed only for
your Mazda.
Use only one temporary spare
tire on your vehicle at the same
time.
Ø
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
(5-Door)
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used (page 5-27).
1. For vehicles equipped with a sub-
woofer, uncouple the connector.
To remove the spare tire
(Sedan)
1. Remove the trunk board.
Connector
NOTE
Extra strength may be required to uncouple the
connector. Be sure to squeeze the tab firmly.
If uncoupling is very difficult, remove the
wiring from the groove in the trunk board.
Then, pull the driver's side of the trunk board
up to remove the spare tire.
2. Turn the tire wing bolt
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the trunk board.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
3. For vehicles equipped with a sub-
woofer, loosen the wing bolt and
remove the woofer and spare tire.
(Sport Wagon)
1. Remove trunk board A and open trunk
board B.
Wing bolt
Lock washer
(Black)
Trunk board B
Sub-woofer
Trunk board A
For vehicles not equipped with a sub-
woofer, loosen the hold-down bolt and
remove the spare tire.
2. For vehicles equipped with a cargo
sub-compartment, remove the cargo
sub-compartment.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
3. For vehicles equipped with a sub-
woofer, loosen the wing bolt and
remove the woofer and spare tire.
Changing a Flat Tire
NOTE
If the following occurs while driving, it could
indicate a flat tire.
Wing bolt
Lock washer
(Black)
l
Steering becomes difficult.
l
The vehicle begins to vibrate excessively.
l
The vehicle pulls in one direction.
Sub-woofer
If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to a
level spot that is well off the road and out
of the way of traffic to change the tire.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a
busy road is dangerous.
WARNING
For vehicles not equipped with a sub-
woofer, loosen the hold-down bolt and
remove the spare tire.
Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tire, and never get under a
vehicle that is supported only by a jack:
Changing a tire is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure
someone.
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle
supported by a jack:
Allowing someone to remain in a
vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury.
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with a sub-woofer, put
the sub-woofer on the left side of the luggage
compartment when removing the spare tire.
CAUTION
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
The wheels equipped on your Mazda
are specially designed for installation
of the tire pressure sensors. Do not
use non-genuine wheels, otherwise it
may not be possible to install the tire
pressure sensors.
To secure the spare tire
Perform the removal procedure in reverse.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
qRemoving a Flat Tire
l
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before
using it.
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a
wheel cover, pry off the wheel cover
with the beveled end of the lug wrench.
l
Be sure to register the tire pressure sensor
ID signal code whenever tires or wheels are
changed (page 5-29).
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in Park (P), a manual
transaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turn
off the engine.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
and away from the vehicle and traffic.
NOTE
Force the end of the lug wrench firmly between
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire
(page 7-3).
wheel and cover, or removal will be difficult.
CAUTION
Align the notch on the wheel cover
with the valve stem when installing
it.
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the flat tire. When blocking a wheel,
place a tire block both in front and
behind the tire.
Notch
Tire valve
NOTE
Damage could occur during
installation if the wheel cover is not
properly aligned.
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocks
of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in
place.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
2. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn each, but
don't remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
WARNING
Use only the front and rear jacking
positions recommended in this manual:
Attempting to jack the vehicle in
positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even
kill someone. Use only the front and
rear jacking positions recommended
in this manual.
Use only the jack provided with your
Mazda:
Using a jack that is not designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
injure someone.
3. Place the jack under the jacking
position closest to the tire being
changed.
Never place objects under the jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle.
4. Insert the lug wrench into the jack.
Jacking position
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
qLocking Lug Nutsí
5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise and
raise the vehicle high enough so that
the spare tire can be installed. Before
removing the lug nuts, make sure your
Mazda is firmly in position and that it
cannot slip or move.
If your vehicle has optional antitheft
wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will
lock the tires and you must use a special
key to unlock them. This key is attached
to the lug wrench and is stored with the
spare tire. Register them with the lock
manufacturer by filling out the card
provided in the glove box and mailing it
in the accompanying envelope. If you lose
this key, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer or use the lock manufacturer's
order form, which is with the registration
card.
Antitheft lug nut
Special key
6. Remove the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise; then remove the
wheel.
To remove an antitheft lug nut
1. Obtain the key for the antitheft lug nut.
2. Place the key on top of the nut, and be
sure to hold the key square to it. If you
hold the key at an angle, you may
damage both key and nut. Don't use a
power impact wrench.
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-11
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
To install the nut
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled
edge inward; tighten them by hand.
1. Place the key on top of the nut, and be
sure to hold the key square to it. If you
hold the key at an angle, you may
damage both key and nut. Don't use a
power impact wrench.
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the key,
apply pressure, and turn it clockwise.
qMounting the Spare Tire
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.
WARNING
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts
and bolts and do not tighten the lug
nuts beyond the recommended
tightening torque:
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts
could loosen while driving and cause
the tire to come off, resulting in an
accident. In addition, lug nuts and
bolts could be damaged if tightened
more than necessary.
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order
shown.
WARNING
Make sure the mounting surfaces of
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean
before changing or replacing tires:
When changing or replacing a tire,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug
nuts could loosen while driving and
cause the tire to come off, resulting in
an accident.
2. Mount the spare tire.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
If you're unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
With sub-woofer
Tire hold-down
bolt (Gold)
Lock washer
Nut tightening torque
88―118
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
Sub-woofer
(9―12, 65―87)
WARNING
Always securely and correctly tighten
the lug nuts:
Improperly or loosely tightened lug
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
wobble or come off. This could result
in loss of vehicle control and cause a
serious accident.
6. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to
the specification charts on page 10-7.
7. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
as soon as possible.
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you
removed or replace them with metric
nuts of the same configuration:
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts
on your Mazda have metric threads,
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.
On a metric stud, it would not secure
the wheel and would damage the
stud, which could cause the wheel to
slip off and cause an accident.
WARNING
Do not drive with any tires that have
incorrect air pressure:
Driving on tires with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tires with
incorrect pressure could affect
handling and result in an accident.
When you check the regular tires' air
pressure, check the spare tire, too.
5. Store the damaged tire, using the tire
hold-down bolt to hold it in place.
NOTE
(5-Door with sub-woofer)
When storing a damaged conventional tire in
the luggage compartment, the sub-woofer can
be stored in its original position, however, the
sub-woofer connector on the trunk board
cannot be connected.
Without sub-woofer
Tire clamp
Tire hold-down bolt
NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store
them properly.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Overheating
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in park (P), a manual
transaxle in neutral.
Overheating
If the temperature gauge indicates
overheating, the vehicle loses power, or
you hear a loud knocking or pinging
noise, the engine is probably too hot.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn off the air conditioner.
5. Check whether coolant or steam is
escaping from under the hood or from
the engine compartment.
WARNING
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment:
Don't go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine.
Wait until the steam dissipates, then
open the hood and start the engine.
Turn off the ignition switch and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
If neither coolant nor steam is
escaping:
Open the hood and idle the engine until
it cools.
CAUTION
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the
engine temperature will increase.
Stop the engine and call an
Do not remove either cooling
system caps when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,
then turn off the engine after the
temperature has decreased.
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no
longer escaping from the engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you.
7. When cool, check the coolant level.
If it's low, look for coolant leaks from
the radiator and hoses.
If the temperature gauge indicates
overheating:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Overheating
If you find a leak or other damage, or if
coolant is still leaking:
Stop the engine and call an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
2.3-liter engine
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir
3.0-liter engine
Coolant reservoir
Cooling
system cap
If you find no problems, the engine is
cool, and no leaks are obvious:
Carefully add coolant as required (page
8-20).
CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the
cooling system inspected. The engine
could be seriously damaged unless
repairs are made. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Starting a Flooded Engine
If the engine fails to start, it may be
flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).
Follow this procedure:
1. If the engine does not start within 5
seconds on the first try, turn the key to
the LOCK position, wait 10 seconds
and try again.
2. Depress the accelerator all the way and
hold it there.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position and hold it there―for up to 10
seconds. If the engine starts, release the
key and accelerator immediately
because the engine will suddenly rev
up.
4. If the engine fails to start, crank it
without depressing the accelerator―for
up to 10 seconds.
If the engine still does not start using the
above procedure, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Jump-Starting
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service
technician do the work.
WARNING
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in
eyes, skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that could
cause sparks:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a
battery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative (
terminal of the battery.
)
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may
rupture or explode, causing serious injury.
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the
discharged battery is dangerous.
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.
The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and
other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in
series or a 24 V motor generator set).
l
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V
and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
Connect the other end to a solid,
stationary, exposed metallic point
(for example, the strut mounting
bolt) away from the discharged
battery (4).
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, don't allow the vehicles to
touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and all
unnecessary electrical loads in both
vehicles.
Jumper cables
3. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence as in the illustration.
l
Connect cables in
Connect one end of a cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged
battery (1).
Attach the other end to the positive
terminal on the booster battery (2).
Connect one end of the other cable
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3).
numerical order and
disconnect in reverse
order.
Discharged Booster battery
battery
l
4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
l
5. When finished, carefully disconnect the
cables in the reverse order described in
Step 3.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Push-Starting
Do not push-start your Mazda.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it:
Towing a vehicle to start it is
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be
injured.
CAUTION
Do not push-start a vehicle that has
a manual transaxle. It can damage
the emission control system.
NOTE
You can't start a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle by pushing it.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Towing Description
CAUTION
Don't tow the vehicle pointed
backward with driving wheels on the
ground. This may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Government and local laws must be
followed.
A towed vehicle usually should have its
drive wheels (front wheels) off the
ground. If excessive damage or other
conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies.
CAUTION
Don't tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage your vehicle. Use
wheel-lift or flatbed equipment.
Wheel dollies
When towing with the rear wheels on the
ground, release the parking brake.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Recreational Towing
CAUTION
Do not use the hooks under the rear
bumper for towing and tying down,
as they cannot hold the load and it
will damage the bumper.
An example of “recreational towing” is
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.
The transaxle is not designed for towing
this vehicle on all 4 wheels.
When doing recreational towing refer to
“Towing Description” (page 7-20) and
carefully follow the instructions.
Hooks
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
8
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Introduction .................................................................................. 8-2
Introduction ............................................................................... 8-2
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................ 8-3
Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico) ....... 8-3
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) ............................................. 8-8
Owner Maintenance ................................................................... 8-15
Owner Maintenance Schedule ................................................ 8-15
Owner Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 8-16
Engine Compartment Overview .............................................. 8-17
Engine Oil ............................................................................... 8-18
Engine Coolant ....................................................................... 8-20
Brake/Clutch Fluid .................................................................. 8-22
Power Steering Fluid ............................................................... 8-23
Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) ........................................... 8-24
Washer Fluid ........................................................................... 8-26
Body Lubrication .................................................................... 8-27
Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 8-28
Battery ..................................................................................... 8-32
Tires ........................................................................................ 8-33
Light Bulbs ............................................................................. 8-38
Fuses ....................................................................................... 8-48
Appearance Care ........................................................................ 8-53
How to Minimize Environmental Paint Damage .................... 8-53
Exterior Care ........................................................................... 8-55
Interior Care ............................................................................ 8-58
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Introduction
Introduction
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you're unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as
prescribed.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
apply.
l
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions
Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2).
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended
intervals.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 1
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
6
12
24
15
18
36
24
48
30
30
60
36
72
45
42
84
48
96
60
Maintenance Interval
12
7.5
22.5
37.5
52.5
ENGINE
Drive belts (tension)
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
I
I
I
Audible inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles), if noisy,
adjust
Engine valve clearance (for 2.3-liter engine)
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
FL22 type*1
Engine coolant
Others
Replace at first 168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 5 years; after
that, every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 2 years
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
R
Fuel lines and hoses*2
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
I
I
I
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
6
12
24
15
18
36
24
48
30
30
60
36
72
45
42
84
48
96
60
Maintenance Interval
12
7.5
22.5
37.5
52.5
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 2
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Maintenance Interval
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts (tension)
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
I
I
I
Audible inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles), if noisy,
adjust
Engine valve clearance (for 2.3-liter engine)
Puerto Rico
Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months
Engine oil
Others
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
FL22 type*1
Engine coolant
Others
Replace at first 168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 5 years; after
that, every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 2 years
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Puerto Rico
R
R
Air filter
Others
R
Fuel lines and hoses*2
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
I
I
I
IGNITION SYSTEM
USA
Replace every 96,000 km (60,000 miles)
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)
Spark plugs
Others*3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Maintenance Interval
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, replace the spark plugs at every 96,000 km
(60,000 miles) or shorter.
a) Repeated short-distance driving
b) Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
c) Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
apply.
l
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions
Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended
intervals.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 1
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
×1000 km
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
ENGINE
Drive belts (tension)
I
I
I
Engine valve clearance (for 2.3-liter engine)
Engine oil
Audible inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
60,000 km or 3 years
FL22 type*1
Engine coolant
Others
R
R
R
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
R
R
I*2
I*2
R
R
R
I*2
I*2
R
R
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses
Hoses and tubes for emission
Fuel filter
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 60,000 km
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
R
I
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
×1000 km
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
R
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 2
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts (tension)
I
Engine valve clearance (for 2.3-liter engine)
Engine oil
Audible inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
60,000 km or 3 years
FL22 type*1
Engine coolant
Others
Engine coolant level
FUEL SYSTEM
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air filter
C
R
C
R
I*2
I*2
R
C
R
Fuel lines and hoses
Hoses and tubes for emission
Fuel filter
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 60,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
R
I
Disc brakes
I
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
R
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
C: Clean
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
(Cont.)
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
×1000 km
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
ENGINE
Drive belts (tension)
I
I
Engine valve clearance (for 2.3-liter engine)
Engine oil
Audible inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
60,000 km or 3 years
FL22 type*1
Engine coolant
Others
Engine coolant level
FUEL SYSTEM
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air filter
C
R
I*2
I*2
R
C
R
C
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses
Hoses and tubes for emission
Fuel filter
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 60,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Steering operation and linkages
Power steering fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Maintenance Interval
Months
×1000 km
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
R
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
C: Clean
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Schedule
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service
technician as soon as possible.
qWhen Refueling
l
Brake and clutch fluid level (page 8-22)
Engine coolant level (page 8-20)
Engine oil level (page 8-19)
Washer fluid level (page 8-26)
l
l
l
qAt Least Monthly
Tire inflation pressures (page 8-33)
qAt Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
l
Automatic transaxle fluid level (page 8-24)
Power steering fluid level (page 8-23)
l
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical
ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.
l
Engine coolant (page 8-20)
Engine oil (page 8-18)
l
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Precautions
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only
for items that are easy to perform.
As explained in the Introduction (page 8-2), several procedures can be done only by a
qualified service technician with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If
you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or
the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a
qualified technician:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You
can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even
more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Turn off the ignition switch and make sure the fan is not running before attempting
to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Compartment Overview
2.3-liter engine
Engine oil-filler cap
Automatic transaxle fluid-level dipstick
(only for automatic transaxle)
Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
Windshield washer
fluid reservoir
Battery
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Fuse block
Engine oil dipstick
Engine coolant
reservoir
Air filter
Cooling system cap
3.0-liter engine
Automatic transaxle fluid-level dipstick
(only for automatic transaxle)
Cooling system cap
Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
Engine coolant
reservoir
Battery
Windshield washer
fluid reservoir
Fuse block
Engine oil dipstick
Engine oil-filler cap
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Air filter
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline
Engines” by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark
symbol conforms to the current engine
and emission system protection standards
and fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricant Standardization
and Approval Committee (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese
Engine Oil
NOTE
Changing the engine oil should be done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qRecommended Oil
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Oil container labels provide important
information.
automobile manufacturers.
A chief contribution this type of oil makes
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of
fuel necessary to overcome engine
friction.
–30
–10
10
30
20
40 50
–20
0
–20
80
100
0
20 40
60
120
U.S.A. and CANADA
5W-20
Except U.S.A. and CANADA
(ILSAC)
(ILSAC)
Mexico
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil. If SAE 5W-20
engine oil is not available in your market. Use
SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC
must be on the label.
3.0-liter engine
–30
–10
10
30
20
40 50
–20
0
Full
OK
–20
80
100
0
20 40
60
120
Low
5W-20
5. Pull it out again and examine the level.
It's OK between Low and Full.
But if it's near or below Low, add
enough oil to bring the level to Full.
qInspecting Engine Oil Level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
surface.
CAUTION
Don't add engine oil over Full. This
may cause engine damage.
2. Warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan.
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is
positioned properly before reinserting
the dipstick.
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
2.3-liter engine
Full
OK
Low
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect the antifreeze protection and
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year―at the beginning of the
winter season―and before traveling
where temperatures may drop below
freezing.
Engine Coolant
qInspecting Coolant Level
WARNING
Do not use a match or live flame in the
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become
very hot. You could be burned.
Carefully inspect the engine coolant
in the coolant reservoir, but do not
open it.
Inspect the condition and connections of
all cooling system and heater hoses.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the FULL or F and
LOW or L marks on the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
2.3-liter engine
Turn off the ignition switch and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
3.0-liter engine
Do not remove the cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
NOTE
If it's at or near LOW or L, add enough
coolant to the coolant reservoir to provide
freezing and corrosion protection and to
bring the level to FULL or F.
Changing the coolant should be done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
CAUTION
If the “FL22” mark is shown on or near the
cooling system cap, use FL22 type engine
coolant. If engine coolant other than FL22
type is used, the engine coolant must be
replaced earlier than the specified replacement
interval indicated in the scheduled
Ø Radiator coolant will damage
paint.
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.
Ø Use only soft (demineralized)
water in the coolant mixture.
Water that contains minerals will
cut down on the coolant's
effectiveness.
maintenance (page 8-3).
Ø Don't add only water. Always add
a proper coolant mixture.
Ø The engine has aluminum parts
and must be protected by an
ethylene-glycol-based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
Ø DO NOT USE coolants Containing
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or
Silicate.
These coolants could damage the
cooling system.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new
coolant is required frequently, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol
with the coolant. This could
damage the cooling system.
Ø Don't use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze.
This would reduce effectiveness.
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qAdding Brake/Clutch Fluid
Brake/Clutch Fluid
WARNING
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on
yourself or on the engine:
q
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level
The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the
same reservoir.
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir
regularly. It should be kept at MAX.
The level normally drops with
accumulated distance, a condition
associated with wear of brake and clutch
linings. If it is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch system inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If it
gets in your eyes, they could be
seriously injured. If this happens,
immediately flush your eyes with
water and get medical attention.
Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine
could cause a fire.
If the brake/clutch fluid level is low,
have the brakes and clutch inspected:
Low brake/clutch fluid levels are
dangerous. Low levels could signal
brake lining wear or a brake system
leak. Your brakes could fail and
cause an accident.
If the fluid level is low, add fluid until it
reaches MAX.
Before adding fluid, thoroughly clean the
area around the cap.
CAUTION
Ø Brake and clutch fluid will
damage painted surfaces. If brake
or clutch fluid does get on a
painted surface, wash it off with
water immediately.
Ø Using nonspecified brake and
clutch fluids (page 10-4) will
damage the systems. Mixing
different fluids will also damage
them.
If the brake/clutch system
frequently requires new fluid,
consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
8-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3.0-liter engine
Power Steering Fluid
Inspect the fluid level at each engine oil
change. Add fluid if necessary; it does not
require periodic changing.
qInspecting Power Steering Fluid
Level
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, don't operate the
vehicle for long periods when the
power steering fluid level is low.
Tighten
Loosen
NOTE
High
Use specified power steering fluid (page 10-4).
OK
Low
2.3-liter engine
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir at
each engine oil change with the engine off
and cold. Add fluid if necessary; it does
not require periodic changing.
The level must be kept between the H and
L marks.
Visually examine the lines and hoses for
leaks and damage.
1. Park on a level surface, well off the
right-of-way, and set the parking brake
firmly.
2. Turn off the engine and allow it to
cool.
3. Remove the filler cap and attached
dipstick.
4. Wipe them clean and put them back.
5. Remove again and inspect the level.
The level must be kept between MIN and
MAX.
6. It must be between H and L. Add fluid
if necessary.
Visually examine the lines and hoses for
leaks and damage.
Don't overfill.
If new fluid is required frequently, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If new fluid is required frequently, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. While the engine is still idling, pull out
the dipstick and wipe it clean, and then
put it back.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(ATF)
5. Check the ATF level. If there is no ATF
adhering 5 mm from the end of the
dipstick, add ATF.
qInspecting Automatic Transaxle
Fluid Level
The automatic transaxle fluid level should
be inspected regularly. Measure it as
described below.
CAUTION
If there is no ATF adhering to the
dipstick even after the engine has
been warmed up, do not drive the
vehicle. Otherwise, the automatic
transaxle could be damaged.
2.3-liter engine
CAUTION
Ø Always check the automatic
transaxle fluid level according to
the following procedure. If the
procedure is not done correctly,
the automatic transaxle fluid level
cannot be measured accurately
which could lead to automatic
transaxle damage.
Ø A low fluid level can cause
transaxle slippage. Overfilling can
cause foaming, loss of fluid, and
transaxle malfunction.
6. Shift the shift lever to each range and
position, and make sure there is no
abnormality.
7. Drive the vehicle on city roads for
5 km (3.1 mile) or more.
8. Park on a level surface and set the
parking brake firmly.
9. Shift the shift lever to the park position
(P), check the ATF level while the
engine is idling, and make sure that the
ATF level is within the proper level. If
the ATF level is not within the proper
level, add ATF.
Ø Use only the specified fluid. A non-
specified fluid could result in
transaxle malfunction and failure.
The proper fluid level is marked on the
dipstick as follows.
1. Park on a level surface and set the
parking brake firmly.
2. Make sure there is no ATF leakage
from the ATF hose or the housing.
2.3-liter engine
3. Shift the shift lever to the park position
(P), start the engine and warm it up.
Full
Low
CAUTION
Do not shift the shift lever while the
engine is warming up. If the ATF level
is extremely low, the automatic
transaxle could be damaged.
8-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3.0-liter engine
5. Pull it out again.
The proper fluid level is marked on the
dipstick as follows.
The volume of fluid changes with
temperature. Fluid must be checked while
idling the engine without driving at
normal operating temperature.
3.0-liter engine
CAUTION
Full
A
Low
Ø Low fluid level causes transaxle
slippage. Overfilling can cause
foaming, loss of fluid, and
B
transaxle malfunction.
Ø Use specified fluid (page 10-4). A
nonspecified fluid could result in
transaxle malfunction and failure.
Fluid hot scale A
1. Park on a level surface and set the
parking brake firmly.
When the vehicle has been driven and the
fluid is at normal operating temperature,
about 65°C (150°F), the level must be
between Full and Low.
2. Start the engine and depress the brake
pedal.
3. Move the shift lever through all ranges,
then set it at P.
Fluid cold scale B
When the engine has not been running
and the outside temperature is about 20°C
(70°F), the fluid level should be close to,
but not above, the bottom notch on the
dipstick.
WARNING
Make sure the brake pedal is applied
before shifting the shift lever:
Shifting the shift lever without first
depressing the brake pedal is
CAUTION
Ø Use the cold scale only as a
reference.
Ø If outside temperature is lower
than about 20°C (70°F), start the
engine and inspect the fluid level
after the engine reaches operating
temperature.
dangerous. The vehicle could move
suddenly and cause an accident.
4. With the engine still idling, pull out the
dipstick, wipe it clean, and put it back.
Ø If the vehicle has been driven for
an extended period at high speeds
or in city traffic in hot weather,
inspect the level only after
stopping the engine and allowing
the fluid to cool for 30 minutes.
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fully insert the dipstick. When adding
fluid, inspect with the dipstick to make
sure it doesn't pass full.
Washer Fluid
qInspecting Washer Fluid Level
WARNING
NOTE
Inspect the fluid on both sides of the dipstick in
a well lit area for an accurate reading.
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze
Protection in Cold Weather:
Operating your vehicle in
temperatures below 4 degrees C (40
degrees F) using washer fluid without
anti-freeze protection is dangerous
as it could cause impaired windshield
vision and result in an accident. In
cold weather, always use washer
fluid with anti-freeze protection.
NOTE
State or local regulations may restrict the use
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which
are commonly used as anti-freeze agents in
washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.
8-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir; add fluid if necessary.
Body Lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door and hood hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
locks during cold weather.
Make sure the hood's secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
Use plain water if washer fluid is
unavailable.
But use only washer fluid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.
8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the blade
assembly to expose the plastic locking
clip.
Compress the clip and slide the
assembly downward; then lift it off the
arm.
Wiper Blades
CAUTION
Ø Hot waxes applied by automatic
car washers have been known to
affect the wiper's ability to clean
windows.
Ø To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, don't use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the blades with foreign matter can reduce
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes.
Plastic locking clip
If the blades are not wiping properly,
clean the window and blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if
necessary.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the windshield
let the wiper arm down easily, don't
let it slap down on the windshield.
2. Hold the end of the rubber and pull
until the tabs are free of the metal
support.
q
Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
Metal support
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, don't try to
sweep the wiper arm by hand.
Tab
NOTE
To prevent damage to the wiper arm blades
when raising both the driver and passenger
side wiper arms, raise the driver side wiper
arm first. Conversely, when setting down the
wiper arms, set the passenger side wiper arm
down first.
8-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
NOTE
CAUTION
Install the blade so that the tabs are toward the
Ø Don't bend or discard the
stiffeners. You need to use them
again.
Ø If the metal stiffeners are
switched, the blade's wiping
efficiency could be reduced.
So don't use the driver's side metal
stiffeners on the passenger's side,
or vice versa.
bottom of the wiper arm.
qReplacing Rear Window Wiper
Blade (5-Door/Sport Wagon)
When the wiper no longer cleans well, the
blade is probably worn or cracked.
Replace it.
Ø Be sure to reinstall the metal
stiffeners in the new blade rubber
so that the curve is the same as it
was in the old blade rubber.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arm
and other components, don't move
the wiper by hand.
8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
(5-Door)
3. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the blade
assembly to expose the plastic locking
clip.
Compress the clip and slide the
assembly downward; then lift it off the
arm.
CAUTION
Don't bend or discard the stiffeners.
You need to use them again.
Plastic locking clip
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the rear
window, don't let the wiper arm fall
on it.
2. Hold the end of the blade rubber and
pull until the tabs are free of the metal
support.
Metal support
Tab
8-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
(Sport Wagon)
3. Remove the metal stiffeners from the
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
1. Raise the wiper arm and rotate the
wiper blade to the right until it unlocks,
then remove the blade.
CAUTION
Don't bend or discard the stiffeners.
You need to use them again.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the rear
window, don't let the wiper arm fall
on it.
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
2. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of the blade holder.
8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery
WARNING
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in
eyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with
water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal tools
to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when working
near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle body:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
8-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qBattery Maintenance
Tires
For reasons of proper performance, safety,
and better fuel economy, always maintain
recommended tire inflation pressures and
stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
WARNING
Using Different Tire Types:
Driving your vehicle with different
types of tires is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor
braking; leading to loss of control.
Except for the limited use of the
temporary spare tire, use only the
same type tires (radial, bias-belted,
bias-type) on all four wheels.
To get the best service from a battery:
l
l
l
Keep it securely mounted.
Keep the top clean and dry.
Keep terminals and connections clean,
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly
or terminal grease.
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
l
l
Rinse off spilled electrolyte
immediately with a solution of water
and baking soda.
If the vehicle will not be used for an
extended time, disconnect the battery
cables and charge the battery every six
weeks.
Using any other tire size than what is
specified for your Mazda (page 10-7)
is dangerous. It could seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, tire
clearance, and speedometer
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tires that
are the correct size specified for your
Mazda.
qTire Inflation Pressure
WARNING
Always inflate the tires to the correct
pressure:
Overinflation or underinflation of
tires is dangerous. Adverse handling
or unexpected tire failure could result
in a serious accident.
Refer to specification charts on page
10-7.
8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí
does not alleviate the need to check the
tire condition every day, including
whether the tires all look inflated properly.
Inspect all tire pressure monthly
(including the spare) when the tires are
cold. Maintain recommended pressures
for the best ride, handling, and minimum
tire wear.
NOTE
l
Always check tire pressure when tires are
cold.
l
l
Warm tires normally exceed recommended
pressures. Don't release air from warm tires
to adjust the pressure.
Underinflation can cause reduced fuel
economy, uneven and accelerated tire wear,
and poor sealing of the tire bead, which
will deform the wheel and cause separation
of tire from rim.
When checking the tire pressures, use of a
digital tire pressure gauge is
recommended.
l
Overinflation can produce a harsh ride,
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a
greater possibility of damage from road
hazards.
Keep your tire pressure at the correct
levels. If one frequently needs inflating,
have it inspected.
qTire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires if
irregular wear develops. According to the
scheduled maintenance charts.Refer to
Scheduled Maintenance on page 8-3.
During rotation, inspect them for correct
balance.
Refer to the specification charts (page
10-7).
Forward
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:
l
Incorrect tire pressure
8-34
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
l
l
l
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
Severe braking
NOTE
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
l
When tires with steel wire reinforcement in
the sidewalls are used, the system may not
function correctly even with a genuine
wheel.
Refer to System Error Activation on page
5-29.
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to
specification (page 10-7) and inspect the
lug nuts for tightness.
l
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors
whenever tires or wheels are replaced.
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-29.
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial
tires that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to
rear, not from side to side. Tire
performance will be weakened if
rotated from side to side.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator
will appear as a solid band across the
tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
qReplacing a Tire
Tread wear indicator
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good
condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
New tread
Worn tread
CAUTION
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
You should replace it before the band is
across the entire tread.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. You should
replace the spare tire when you replace the
other road tires due to the aging of the spare
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and
year is indicated with 4 digit.
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-22.
8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
qTemporary Spare Tire
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. You should
replace the spare tire when you replace the
other road tires due to the aging of the spare
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and
year is indicated with 4 digit.
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least
monthly to make sure it's properly inflated
and stored.
NOTE
The temporary spare tire condition gradually
deteriorates even if it has not been used.
The temporary spare tire is easier to
handle because of its construction which
is lighter and smaller than a conventional
tire. This tire should be used only for an
emergency and only for a short distance.
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-22.
qReplacing a Wheel
Use the temporary spare tire only until the
conventional tire is repaired, which should
be as soon as possible.
WARNING
Always use wheels of the correct size
on your vehicle:
Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be affected, leading to loss of
control and an accident.
Maintain its pressure at 420 kPa (4.2
kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).
CAUTION
Ø Do not use your temporary spare
tire rim with a snow tire or a
conventional tire. Neither will
properly fit and could damage
both tire and rim.
Ø The temporary spare tire has a
tread life of less than 5,000 km
(3,000 miles). The tread life may
be shorter depending on driving
conditions.
Ø The temporary spare tire is for
limited use, however, if the tread
wear solid-band indicator
appears, replace the tire with the
same type of temporary spare
(page 8-35).
8-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
Ø A wrong-sized wheel may
adversely affect:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Tire fit
Wheel and bearing life
Ground clearance
Speedometer calibration
Headlight aim
Bumper height
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Ø (With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
Ø
When replacing/repairing the
tires or wheels or both, have the
work done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer, or the tire
pressure sensors may be
damaged.
Ø
The wheels equipped on your
Mazda are specially designed
for installation of the tire
pressure sensors. Do not use
non-genuine wheels, otherwise
it may not be possible to install
the tire pressure sensors.
NOTE
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors
whenever tires or wheels are replaced. Refer to
Tires and Wheels on page 5-29.
When replacing a wheel, make sure the
new one is the same as the original factory
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.
Proper tire balancing provides the best
riding comfort and helps reduce tread
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause
vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and flat spots.
8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Light Bulbs
Sedan/5-Door
Overhead light/
Map lights
Luggage compartment
light (Hatchback)
Headlights
(Low beam)
Trunk light
High-mount brake light
(Sedan)
Fog lights
Headlights
(High beam)
Parking lights
Courtesy lights
Side-marker lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Rear turn signal lights
Reverse lights
Front turn signal lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light (Hatchback)
Taillights
Sport Wagon
Overhead light/
Map lights
Taillights
Luggage compartment light
Brake lights/Taillights
Headlights
(Low beam)
Fog lights
Headlights
(High beam)
Parking lights
Courtesy lights
Side-marker lights
Front turn signal lights
License plate lights
Rear turn signal lights
Reverse lights
High-mount brake light
8-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fog lights
WARNING
1. If you are changing the left fog light
bulb, start the engine, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the right, and turn
off the engine. If you are changing the
right fog light bulb, turn the steering
wheel to the left.
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself:
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself is dangerous. Because the
xenon fusion bulbs require high
voltage, you could receive an electric
shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement
is necessary.
2. Turn the screws counterclockwise and
remove them.
3. Turn the center section of the plastic
retainers counterclockwise and remove
them, and partially peel back the
mudguard.
Never touch the glass portion of a
halogen bulb with your bare hands and
always wear eye protection when
handling or working around the bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it
will explode and serious injuries
could be caused by the flying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when
lit.
Removal
Installation
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the
reach of children:
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise, and carefully pull it
backward.
Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb
or breaking it some other way.
qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs
Replacing the headlight, and parking
light bulbs
Due to the complexity and difficulty of
the procedure, the bulbs should be
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Disconnect the socket and bulb
assembly from the electrical connector
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your finger and pulling it.
2. Remove the bulb by pushing it in
slightly and turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
NOTE
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol
before being used.
Side-marker lights
1. If you are changing the left side-maker
light, start the engine, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the right, and turn
off the engine. If you are changing the
right side-maker light, turn the steering
wheel to the left.
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
l
Use the protective cover and carton for the
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb
promptly and out of the reach of children.
2. Turn the screws counterclockwise and
remove them.
6. Install the new socket and bulb
assembly in the reverse order of
removal.
Front turn signal lights
1. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
8-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Turn the center section of the plastic
retainers counterclockwise and remove
them, and partially peel back the
mudguard.
Brake lights/Taillights, Rear turn signal
lights
(Sedan)
1. Pull the center section of the plastic
retainer and remove the retainers and
partially open the trunk side trim.
Removal
Installation
Removal
Installation
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Brake lights/Taillights
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Rear turn signal lights
2. Pull the strap and remove the cover.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
NOTE
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Brake lights/Taillights
(5-Door)
1. Turn the knob and remove the cover.
Left side
Right side
Rear turn signal lights
8-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
NOTE
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
(Sport Wagon)
1. Turn the knob and remove the cover.
Left side
Right side
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
NOTE
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Reverse lights, Taillights
(Sedan)
2. Pull the strap and remove the cover.
1. Pull the center section of the plastic
retainer and remove the retainers, then
remove the trunk rear trim.
Removal
Installation
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
8-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
2. Detach the electrical connector from
the socket.
Reverse lights
Taillights
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
(5-Door/Sport Wagon)
1. Remove the cover.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
(5-Door)
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
1. Remove the cover.
Reverse lights
Taillights
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
High-mount brake light
(Sedan)
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
1. Remove the high-mount brake light
component.
8-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
(Sport Wagon)
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim and
high-mount brake light component.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs
Overhead light/Map lights (With
overhead console)
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
1. Remove the screws.
2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the trim and
gently insert it in the overhead light as
shown in the figure, and then remove
the overhead light unit.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
License plate lights
1. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the lens and
remove the lens by carefully prying on
the edge of the lens.
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
8-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
Overhead light/Map lights (Without
overhead console)
Courtesy lights, Vanity mirror lights,
and Luggage compartment light
1. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the trim and
gently insert it in the overhead light as
shown in the figure, and then remove
the overhead light unit.
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the
lens and remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
Courtesy lights
Edge
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
8-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Luggage compartment light
(Sport Wagon)
Vanity mirror lights
(Type A)
Edge
Edge
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
Vanity mirror lights
(Type B)
Trunk light (Sedan)
1. Press both sides of the lens cap to
remove it.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
Edge
Luggage compartment light
(5-Door)
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
8-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse
puller provided on the fuse block
located in the engine compartment.
Fuses
Your vehicle's electrical system is
protected by fuses.
If any lights, accessories, or controls don't
work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
that system and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
qFuse Replacement
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it's
blown.
Replacing the fuses on the driver's side
kick-panel
If the electrical system does not work,
first inspect the fuses on the driver's side
kick-panel.
1. Turn off the ignition switch and other
switches.
2. Open the fuse panel cover by sliding
the cover straight back toward you.
Blown
Normal
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage
rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it
does not fit tightly, have an expert
install it. We recommend an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the AUDIO or CIGAR circuit.
CAUTION
Pulling the cover off sideways may
break the retaining tabs off.
CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with one of the
same rating. Otherwise you may
damage the electric system.
8-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Replacing the fuses under the hood
WARNING
If the headlights or other electrical
Do not replace the main fuse by
yourself. Have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer perform the replacement:
Replacing the fuse by yourself is
dangerous because the MAIN fuse is
a high current fuse. Incorrect
replacement could cause an electrical
shock or a short circuit resulting in a
fire.
components do not work and the fuses in
the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:
1. Turn off the ignition switch and all
other switches.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is
blown, replace it with a new one of the
same amperage rating.
Normal
Blown
8-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qFuse Panel Description
Fuse block (Engine compartment)
FUSE
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
RATING
1
2
3
4
5
6
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
M.DEF
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
7.5A
―
Mirror defrosterí
Injector
―
INJ
15A
10A*1
15A*2
―
7
8
ENG BAR
Air flow sensor, EGR control valve
―*1
―
ENG BB*2
HEAD LR
HEAD LL
HEAD HL
HEAD HR
ETC
5A
Cooling fan
9
15A
15A
10A
10A
7.5A
10A
20A
Headlight-low beam (Right)
Headlight-low beam (Left)
Headlight-high beam (Left)
Headlight-high beam (Right)
Accelerator position sensor
Turn signal lights
10
11
12
13
14
15
HAZARD
STOP
Brake/Horn
8-50
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
FUSE
RATING
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
15A*1
10A*2
7.5A
15A
30A
30A
―
16
TCM
TCM
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
ENG+B
FUEL PUMP
IG KEY1
P.WIND
―
PCM, TCM
Fuel pump
Engine control unit, Lighter
Power window
―
―
DRL
20A
―
DRL
―
BLOWER
BTN
40A
40A
Blower motor
Overhead light, Power door lock
Rear wiper motorí, Heater control unit, Windshield wiper and
washer
26
IG KEY2
40A
27
28
DEFOG
ABS
40A
60A
Rear window defroster
ABSí
AD FAN*1
FAN2*2
FAN*1
29
30
30A
30A
Cooling fan
Cooling fan
FAN1*2
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
TAIL
10A
10A
10A
15A
30A
7.5A
―
Taillights, License plate lights, Parking lights
ILLUMI
MAG
Dashboard illumination
Magnet clutch
Audio system
Power seatí
AUDIO
P.SEAT
OPENER
Trunk opener motorí
―
―*1
―
―
―
38
IG1*2
FOG
15A
15A
120A
CAT SSR
Fog lightsí
39
40
MAIN
For protection of all circuits
*1 2.3-liter engine
*2 3.0-liter engine
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-51
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse block (Driver's side kick-panel)
FUSE
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
Accessory socket
RATING
1
2
CIGAR
ENGINE IG
A/C
15 A
15 A
10 A
5 A
Engine control system
Heater
3
4
MIRROR
SAS
Power control mirror
ABS unit, SAS unit
Seat warmerí
5
10 A
15 A
5 A
6
SEAT
7
METER ACC
METER IG
R.WIP
Audio light off unit
Instrument cluster
Rear wiperí
8
15 A
10 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
―
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D.LOCK
R.CIGAR
WIPER
Power door locks
Accessory socket
Windshield wiper and washer
Overhead light
ROOM
SPARE
―
―
―
SPARE
―
SPARE
―
8-52
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
qDamage Caused by Bird
Dropping, Insects, or Tree Sap
How to Minimize
Environmental Paint Damage
Occurrence
The paintwork on your Mazda represents
the latest technical developments in
composition and methods of application.
Bird droppings contain acids. If these
aren't removed they can eat away the clear
and color base coat of the vehicle's
paintwork.
Environmental hazards, however, can
harm the paint's protective properties, if
proper care is not taken.
When insects stick to the paint surface
and decompose, corrosive compounds
form. These can erode the clear and color
base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if
they are not removed.
Here are some examples of possible
damage, with tips on how to prevent
them.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
qEtching Caused by Acid Rain or
Industrial Fallout
permanently to the paint finish. If you
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
vehicle paint could come off with it.
Occurrence
Prevention
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew
to form acids. These acids can settle on a
vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,
the acid becomes concentrated and can
damage the finish.
It is necessary to have your Mazda
washed and waxed to preserve its finish
according to the instructions in this
section. This should be done as soon as
possible.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for
damage.
Bird droppings can be removed with a
soft sponge and water. If you are traveling
and these are not available, a moistened
tissue may also take care of the problem.
The cleaned area should be waxed
according to the instructions in this
section.
Insects and tree sap are best removed with
a soft sponge and water or a commercially
available chemical cleaner.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you suspect that acid rain has settled on
your vehicle's finish.
Another method is to cover the affected
area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.
8-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
NOTE
l
qWater Marks
The paint chipping zone varies with the
Occurrence
speed of the vehicle. For example, when
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).
In low temperatures a vehicle's finish
hardens. This increases the chance of paint
chipping.
Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on
your Mazda. Before this happens, repair the
damage by using Mazda touch-up paint
according to the instructions in this section.
Failure to repair the affected area could
lead to serious rusting and expensive
repairs.
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can
contain harmful minerals such as salt and
lime. If moisture containing these
minerals settles on the vehicle and
evaporates, the minerals will concentrate
and harden to form white rings. The rings
can damage your vehicle's finish.
l
l
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you find water marks on your vehicle's
finish.
qPaint Chipping
Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits
your vehicle.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of
having your paint chipped by flying
gravel.
8-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
l
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
and a soft cloth when washing the
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
Rub gently when washing or drying the
vehicle.
Take your vehicle only to a car wash
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
Don't use abrasive cleansers or wax
that contain abrasives.
Exterior Care
Follow all label and container directions
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.
Read all warnings and cautions.
l
l
l
qMaintaining the Finish
Washing
To help protect the finish from rust and
deterioration, wash your Mazda
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
CAUTION
Ø Don't use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may damage the protective
coating; also, cleaners and
detergents may discolor or
deteriorate the paint.
Ø To prevent damaging the antenna,
remove it before entering a car
wash facility or passing beneath a
low overhead clearance.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the
paint surface could be scratched. Here are
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
Scratches occur on the paint surface
when:
l
The vehicle is washed without first
rinsing off dirt and other foreign
matter.
The vehicle is washed with a rough,
l
Pay special attention to removing salt,
dirt, mud, and other foreign material from
the underside of the fenders, and make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are clean.
dry, or dirty cloth.
l
l
The vehicle is washed at a car wash
that uses brushes that are dirty or too
stiff.
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives
are used.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can
damage the finish if not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
NOTE
l
Mazda is not responsible for scratches
caused by automatic car washes or
improper washing.
l
Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles
with darker paint finishes.
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with
lukewarm or cold water. Don't allow soap
to dry on the finish.
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's
paint finish:
Rinse off any dirt or other foreign
l
matter using lukewarm or cold water
before washing.
8-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from
forming.
qRepairing Damage to the Finish
Deep scratches or chips on the finish
should be repaired promptly. Exposed
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
repairs.
WARNING
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance is normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
CAUTION
If your Mazda is damaged and needs
metal parts repaired or replaced,
make sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to all parts,
both repaired and new. This will
prevent them from rusting.
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
qBright-Metal Maintenance
Waxing
l
Use tar remover to remove road tar and
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when
water no longer beads on the finish.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool.
To prevent corrosion on bright-metal
l
surfaces, apply wax or chrome
preservative and rub it to a high luster.
During cold weather or in coastal areas,
l
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.
Waxes containing abrasive will remove
paint and could damage bright metal
parts.
cover bright-metal parts with a coating
of wax or preservative heavier than
usual. It would also help to coat them
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or
some other protective compound.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colors.
CAUTION
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
Don't use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar
materials will usually also take off the wax.
Rewax these areas even if the rest of the
vehicle doesn't need it.
deterioration.
8-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
qUnderbody Maintenance
qAluminum Wheel Maintenance
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and
snow removal and solvents used for dust
control may collect on the underbody. If
not removed, they will speed up rusting
and deterioration of such underbody parts
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust
system, even though these parts may be
coated with anti-corrosive material.
A protective coating is provided over the
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed
to protect this coating.
NOTE
l
Don't use a wire brush or any abrasive
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on
aluminum wheels. They may damage the
coating.
l
Only use a mild soap or neutral detergent
Thoroughly flush the underbody and
wheel housings with lukewarm or cold
water at the end of each winter. Try also
to do this every month.
and always use a sponge or soft cloth to
clean the wheels.
Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm or cold
water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels
after driving on dusty or salted roads. This
helps prevent corrosion.
Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic
car wash that uses high-speed or hard
brushes.
Pay special attention to these areas
because they easily hide mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet
down the road grime without removing
it.
l
l
If your aluminum wheels lose luster, wax
the wheels.
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes that
should not be clogged. Water trapped
there will cause rusting.
WARNING
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance is normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
8-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
To keep the fabric looking clean and
fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color
will be affected, it can be stained easily,
and its fire-resistance may be reduced.
Interior Care
qDashboard Precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume
and cosmetic oils from contacting the
dashboard. They'll damage and discolor it.
If these solutions get on the dashboard,
wipe them off immediately.
CAUTION
Use only recommended cleaners and
procedures. Others may affect
appearance and fire-resistance.
CAUTION
Do not use glazing agents.
Glazing agents contain ingredients
which may cause discoloration,
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.
qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing
Clean the webbing with a mild soap
solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Follow instructions. Don't bleach
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.
qCleaning the Upholstery and
Interior Trim
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry
the belt webbing and make sure there is
no remaining moisture before retracting
them.
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
cleaner.
WARNING
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
replace damaged seat belts
immediately:
Leatherí
Real leather isn't uniform and may have
scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it
with a leather cleaner or mild soap.
Using damaged seat belts is
dangerous. In a collision, damaged
belts cannot provide adequate
protection.
Wipe it with a damp soft cloth; then dry
and buff it with a dry soft cloth.
qCleaning the Window Interiors
Fabricí
If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them
with glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the container.
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean it with a mild soap solution good
for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh
spots immediately with a fabric spot
cleaner.
CAUTION
Don't scrape or scratch the inside of
the rear window. You may damage
the rear window defroster grid.
8-58
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting
Safety Defects
9
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
Customer Assistance ............................... 9-2
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ............ 9-2
Customer Assistance (Canada) ........... 9-4
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico) .... 9-7
Customer Assistance (Mexico) ........... 9-8
Tire Information (U.S.A.) ..................... 9-22
Tire Labeling ..................................... 9-22
Location of the Tire Label
(Placard) ............................................ 9-28
Tire Maintenance .............................. 9-31
Vehicle Loading ................................ 9-34
Steps for Determining the Correct Load
Limit: ................................................ 9-41
Mazda Importer/Distributors ............... 9-10
Importer/Distributor .......................... 9-10
Distributor in Each Area ................... 9-10
Reporting Safety Defects ....................... 9-42
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.) .... 9-42
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada) ... 9-43
Warranty ................................................ 9-12
Warranties for Your Mazda ............... 9-12
Outside the United States .................. 9-13
Outside Canada ................................. 9-14
Service Publications .............................. 9-44
Service Publications .......................... 9-44
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country (Except United States and
Canada) ............................................. 9-15
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories ....................................... 9-16
Cell Phones ............................................. 9-17
Cell Phones Warning ......................... 9-17
Type Approval of Equipment ............... 9-18
Type Approval of Equipment ............ 9-18
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) ................................................ 9-20
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) .......................................... 9-20
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle
in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management, you can reach Mazda North American Operations by one of the following
ways.
Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
the U.S., can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” at the bottom of the page at www.mazdaUSA.com
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Canada)
qSatisfaction Review Process
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. In
our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your
dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal
dealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General
Manager.
qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda
Canada Inc.Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address
and phone numbers are shown (page 9-6).
qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800)
263-4680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identification Labels” page
of section 10 of this manual for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date
5. Present odometer reading
6. Your dealer's name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.
qMediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer
Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still
not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about
how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through
binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that
goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the
award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,
Mazda, and/or one of it's dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish
to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:
Province/Territory
British Columbia & Yukon Territories
Alberta & Northwest Territories
Saskatchewan
CAMVAP Number
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
Manitoba
Ontario
Atlantic Canada
Quebec
qRegional Offices
REGIONAL OFFICES
AREAS COVERED
MAZDA CANADA INC.
WESTERN REGION
8171 ACKROYD ROAD
SUITE 2000
ALBERTA,
BRITISH COLUMBIA,
MANITOBA,
RICHMOND B.C.
V6X 3K1
SASKATCHEWAN,
YUKON
(604) 303-5670
MAZDA CANADA INC.
CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION
55 VOGELL ROAD,
ONTARIO
RICHMOND HILL,
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5
(905) 787-7000
MAZDA CANADA INC.
QUEBEC REGION
6111 ROUTE TRANS
CANADIENNE
QUEBEC,
NEW BRUNSWICK,
NOVA SCOTIA,
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC
H9R 5A5
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,
NEWFOUNDLAND
(514) 694-6390
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized
Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top
condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
qSTEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Mexico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle
in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
l
If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
l
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP2.
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda Motor de Mexico
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management and it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the
supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical
conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda Motor de Mexico
by one of the following ways.
Log on: at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
Mexico, can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx
By phone at: 1 (866) 315 0220
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Importer/Distributor
Distributor in Each Area
qU.S.A.
qCANADA
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Mazda Canada Inc.
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)
q
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto
Rico)
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00936-2722
TEL: (787) 641-9300
qMEXICO
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Circuito Guillermo Gonzalez Camarena N
1500 Col. Centro de Ciudad Santa Fe.
01210, Mexico, D.F.
TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:
01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico
qGUAM
Triple J Motors
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,
GUAM 96911 USA
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931
TEL: (671) 649-6555
qSAIPAN
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234-7524
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051
qAMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American
Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699-9347
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Warranties for Your Mazda
l
l
l
l
l
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Distributor Major Component Limited Warranty (Canada only)
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
Federal Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)
l
Emission Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
l
l
l
l
l
California Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)
Emission Control Warranty (Canada only)
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Tire Warranty
NOTE
Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda.
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside the United States
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United
States may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside the United States. However, in the event that you are moving to Canada
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety requirements (CMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on
vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United
States:
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
l
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside Canada
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission
regulations and safety regulations. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada may differ
from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on
vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada:
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
l
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except
United States and Canada)
Government regulations in your country could require that automobiles meet specific
emission and safety standards.
Vehicles built for your country may differ from those built for other countries. In addition
to registration problems, satisfactory service may be difficult or even impossible in another
country.
The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your
vehicle.
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.
These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your
vehicle's performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed
parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance or safety
systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of
injuries in an accident.
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as
mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an
improper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine
stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Cell Phones
Cell Phones Warning
WARNING
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication
equipment in vehicles in your country:
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of
these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious
accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe
area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-
free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell
phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead,
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Type Approval of Equipment
Type Approval of Equipment
Immobilizer system
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Type Approval of Equipment
Keyless entry system
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and
temperature performance.
qTread Wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
qTraction-AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction
tests and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
qTemperature-A, B, C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
WARNING
Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:
Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary
with respect to grade.
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND
TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
qUniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
UTQGS MARK (example)
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Labeling
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire
and also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case of
a recall.
qInformation on Passenger Vehicle Tires
Please refer to the diagram below.
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number
2. Passenger car tire
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
5. Radial
6. Rim diameter code
7. Load index & speed symbol
8. Severe snow conditions
9. Tire ply composition and materials used
10. Max. load rating
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
11. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades
12. Max. permissible inflation pressure
13. SAFETY WARNING
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
NOTE
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
215
“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
65
“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
R
“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.
15
“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
95
“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each
tire can support.
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
H
“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
99 mph
Q
R
S
106 mph
112 mph
118 mph
124 mph
130 mph
149 mph
168* mph
186* mph
T
U
H
V
W
Y
* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow
AT: All Terrain.
AS: All Season. The “M+S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in
mud and snow.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. In
general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and other.
Maximum Load Rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by
the tire.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under
normal driving conditions.
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Snow Tires
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels.
Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other
tires on your vehicle.
SAFETY WARNING
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:
l
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-
MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa)
TO SEAT BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT
TIRES.
l
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-
FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qInformation on Temporary Tires
Please refer to the diagram below.
1. Temporary tires
2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
4. Diagonal
5. Rim diameter code
6. Load index&speed symbol
T115/70D 16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
115
“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
70
“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
D
“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.
16
“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
90
“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each
tire can support.
M
“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
M
81 mph
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)
You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.
SAMPLE
qRecommended Tire Inflation Pressure
On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psi
for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the
inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is
maintained.
Refer to Tires on page 10-7.
NOTE
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing the tire pressure.
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
WARNING
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the
information in this owner's manual:
Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may
result in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing
and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
results in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire
can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking
at them.
qChecking Tire Pressure
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold ―meaning they are not
hot from driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.
5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the
valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
6. Replace the valve cap.
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.
NOTE
Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure.
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other
irregularities.
NOTE
Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures. Don't release air from warm tires to adjust the
pressure.
Under-inflation can cause serious failures and accidents.
Over-inflation can produce a harsh ride and the greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qGlossary of Terms
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and
the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of
manufacture.
Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and
cargo.
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's
mounted on the vehicle.
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity
is described on the tire label.
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
9-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Maintenance
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are
some important maintenance points:
qTire Inflation Pressure
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the
pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.
qTire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular
wear develops. During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.
Forward
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a
combination of the following:
l
Incorrect tire pressure
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
Severe braking
l
l
l
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to specification (page 10-7) and inspect the lug nuts
for tightness.
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern
or studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be
weakened if rotated from side to side.
(With limited-slip differential)
Don't use the following:
Ø Tires not of the designated size
Ø Tires of different sizes or types at the same time
Ø Tires not sufficiently inflated
If these instructions aren't followed, the rotation of the left and right wheels will be
different and will thus apply a constant load on the limited-slip differential.
This will cause a malfunction.
qReplacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could
result in an accident.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. Replace
the tire when this happens.
Tread wear indicator
New tread
Worn tread
You should replace it before the band is across the entire tread.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high
loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you
replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and
year is indicated with 4 digit. Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-22.
9-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qSafety Practices
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate
good driving habits for your own benefit.
l
Observe posted speed limits
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Do no run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking
l
l
l
CAUTION
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your
tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution
until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire
is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with
your spare tire. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest
vehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Vehicle Loading
WARNING
Do not taw a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle
damage.
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep
your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Safety
Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:
WARNING
Overloaded Vehicle:
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's
suspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure,
handling or steering problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the
distance required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail
completely, particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a
combination of the size of the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation
pressure.
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the
vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.
9-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed to
carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load
Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for “THE
COMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER
EXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire
label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any
aftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of
the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be
accurate.
9-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
CARGO
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of
cargo weight.
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from
the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire
label.
9-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg
(849 lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:
_
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg
(699 lbs)
_
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2)
lbs) = 249 kg (549 lbs)
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) -
including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo + passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver's door
frame or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
9-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
WARNING
Exceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits:
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and
could result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling,
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, or loss of control.
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.
Do not taw a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle
damage.
9-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
GCW
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW) plus the
weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the
vehicle and the loaded trailer - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can
handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle's braking system is rated
for operation at GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers weighing more than 1,500 lbs). The GCW must
never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer
the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options, no cargo (internal or
_
_
external), a tongue load of 10 15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15 25%
(fifth-wheel trailer), and driver only (150 lbs). Consult your dealership (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth-Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a
trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 lb conventional trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a
proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lbs. For an 11,500 lb fifth-wheel trailer, multiply by
0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875 lbs.
9-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
WARNING
Exceeding GVWR or GAWR Specifications:
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or
damage to the vehicle.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
9-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit:
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
_
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 × 150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
9-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor
Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda
Importer/Distributor).
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You
can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
NOTE
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, California 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page 9-10) in
this booklet.
9-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm
9-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
Service Publications
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do
some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the
chart below.
If they don't have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER
9999-95-063B-08
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
2008 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)
2008 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)
2008 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)
2008 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)
2008 OWNER'S MANUAL
9999-MX-063B-08
9999-95-039G-08
9999-MX-039G-08
9999-95-078C-08 (U.S.A. only)
9999-EC-078C-08 (Canada only)
9999-PR-078C-08 (Puerto Rico, Mexico only)
9999-95-MODL-08
2008 OWNER'S MANUAL
2008 OWNER'S MANUAL
2008 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS
qWORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and
chassis.
qWIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical
system.
qOWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.
This is not a technician's manual.
qSERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:
Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.
9-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
10
Technical information about your Mazda.
Identification Numbers ............................................................... 10-2
Vehicle Information Labels ..................................................... 10-2
Specifications ............................................................................... 10-4
Specifications .......................................................................... 10-4
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification Numbers
qVehicle Emission Control
Information Label
Vehicle Information Labels
qVehicle Identification Number
The vehicle identification number legally
identifies your vehicle. The number is on
a plate attached to the left top side of the
dashboard. This plate can easily be seen
through the windshield.
qTire Pressure Label
q
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
qEngine Number
2.3-liter engine
Forward
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification Numbers
3.0-liter engine
Forward
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications
qEngine
Specification
Item
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
DOHC-24V 60°V, 6-cylinder
89.0 × 79.5 mm (3.50 × 3.13 in)
2,967 ml (2,967 cc, 181.0 cu in)
10.0
Type
DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder
87.5 × 94.0 mm (3.44 × 3.70 in)
2,261 ml (2,261 cc, 137.9 cu in)
9.7
Bore×Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
qElectrical System
Item
Classification
12V-50AH/5HR
LFG1 18 110*1
L3Y2 18 110
Battery
2.3-liter engine
Spark-plug number
3.0-liter engine
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
AJ57 18 110*1*2
1.25―1.35 mm (0.050―0.053 in)
Spark-plug gap
*1 ex factory
1.29―1.45 mm (0.051―0.057 in)
*2 Verify the spark plug type from the spark plug itself. If the spark plug type cannot be determined, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate
coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.
qLubricant Quality
Lubricant
Classification
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers
on page 8-18.
Engine oil
API Service
SAE
GL-4 or GL-5
75W-90
Any temperature
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
API Service
SAE
GL-4 or GL-5
80W-90
Manual transaxle oil
Above 10°C (50°F)
API Service
SAE
GL-4 or GL-5
75W-90
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
ATF M-V
JWS3309
Automatic transaxle fluid
Power steering fluid
Brake fluid
ATF M-V, or equivalent (e.g. Dexron® III)
SAE J1703, or FMVSS116 DOT-3
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
qCapacities
(Approximate Quantities)
Item
Capacity
With oil filter
replacement
4.3 L (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)
2.3-liter engine
Without oil filter
replacement
3.9 L (4.1 US qt, 3.4 Imp qt)
5.7 L (6.0 US qt, 5.0 Imp qt)
5.2 L (5.5 US qt, 4.6 Imp qt)
Engine oil
With oil filter
replacement
3.0-liter engine
Without oil filter
replacement
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
7.0 L (7.4 US qt, 6.2 Imp qt)
8.5 L (9.0 US qt, 7.5 Imp qt)
2.87 L (3.03 US qt, 2.53 Imp qt)
2.3 L (2.4 US qt, 2.0 Imp qt)
8.14 L (8.60 US qt, 7.16 Imp qt)
7.0 L (7.4 US qt, 6.1 Imp qt)
68.0 L (18.0 US gal, 15.0 Imp gal)
Coolant
Manual transaxle oil
Automatic transaxle fluid
Fuel tank
Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.
qDimensions
Item
Specification
Sedan
4,745 mm*3 (186.8 in), 4,765 mm*4 (187.6 in)
4,745 mm*3 (186.8 in), 4,765 mm*4 (187.6 in)
4,770 mm*3 (187.8 in), 4,785 mm*4 (188.4 in)
1,780 mm (70.1 in)
Overall length
5-Door
Sport Wagon
Overall width
Overall height
Sedan/5-Door
Sport Wagon
1,440 mm (56.7 in)
1,455 mm (57.3 in)
Track, front
Track, rear
Wheelbase
1,540 mm*1 (60.6 in), 1,530 mm*2 (60.2 in)
1,540 mm*1 (60.6 in), 1,530 mm*2 (60.2 in)
2,675 mm (105.3 in)
*1 16-inch wheel vehicle
*2 17-inch/18-inch wheel vehicle
*3 Without license plate holder
*4 With license plate holder
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
qWeights
Specification
Item
Weight
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
1,940 kg (4,279 lbs)
1,005 kg (2,216 lbs)
936 kg (2,064 lbs)
2,052 kg (4,526 lbs)
1,084 kg (2,390 lbs)
968 kg (2,136 lbs)
2.3-liter engine
3.0-liter engine
Front
Rear
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Front
Rear
qAir Conditioner
Item
Classification
Refrigerant Type
HFC134a (R-134a)
qLight Bulbs
Exterior light
Category
Light bulb
Wattage
ECE R (SAE)
H1 (―)
High beam
55
55
35
27
5
Headlights
Halogen
Low beam
H1 (―)
Xenon fusion
D2S (―)
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights
― (#2357A)
W5W (―)
Fog lightsí
55
5
H11 (H11)
Side-marker lights
― (―)
Non-LED bulb
LED bulb*2
18.4
4
W16W (#921)
― (―)
Sedan
High-mount brake light 5-Door
Sport Wagon
21
21
4
W21W (#7440)
W21W (#7440)
― (―)
Non-LED bulb
LED bulb*2
Sedan/5-Door
Sport wagon
21
21
21/5
5*1
18.4
5
WY21W (―)
W21W (#7440)
W21/5W (#7443)
W21/5W (#7443)
W16W (#921)
W5W (―)
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Taillights
Reverse lights
License plate lights
*1 Use a 21/5W type bulb.
*2 Bulb replacement is not possible because it is built into the unit. Replace the unit.
10-6
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Interior light
Category
Light bulb
Wattage
ECE R
―
Trunk light (Sedan)
Overhead light/Map lights
Courtesy lights
3
5
W5W
W5W
―
5
Type A
1.2
3
Vanity mirror lights*
Type B
―
5-Door
5
―
Luggage compartment light
* Vanity mirror lights
Type A
Sport Wagon
10
―
Type B
qTires
NOTE
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.
When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally fitted to
your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure.
Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 8-33.
Standard tire
Inflation pressure
Tire size
Front
Rear
P205/60R16 91V
P215/50R17 93V
220 kPa
220 kPa
(2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi or lb/po2)
(2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi or lb/po2)
240 kPa
240 kPa
215/45R18 93W
(2.4 kgf/cm2, 35 psi or lb/po2)
(2.4 kgf/cm2, 35 psi or lb/po2)
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Temporary spare tire
Tire size
Inflation pressure
T115/70D16
420 kPa (60 psi)
qFuses
Refer to the fuse rating on page 8-48.
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
11
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
B
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Brake/Clutch
Accessories ....................................... 9-16
Air Bag Systems ............................... 2-45
Ambient Temperature Display .......... 6-50
Antenna ............................................. 6-14
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 5-7
Warning light ............................... 5-8
Appearance Care ............................... 8-53
Audio System ................................... 6-14
Audio control switch .................. 6-42
Audio set .................................... 6-25
Operating tips for audio
Fluid ........................................... 8-22
Brakes
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ..... 5-7
Foot brake .................................... 5-5
Pad wear indicator ........................ 5-9
Parking brake ............................... 5-5
Warning light ............................... 5-6
Break-In Period ................................... 4-6
Bulb Replacement ............................. 8-38
C
system ........................................ 6-14
Safety certification ..................... 6-45
Automatic Transaxle
Capacities .......................................... 10-5
Carbon Monoxide ............................... 4-4
Cargo Securing Loops ...................... 6-55
Cargo Sub-Compartment .................. 6-55
Catalytic Converter ............................. 4-3
Cell Phones ....................................... 9-17
Center Box ........................................ 6-53
Center Console .................................. 6-54
Child Restraint
Driving tips ................................ 5-17
Fluid ........................................... 8-24
Manual shift mode ..................... 5-14
Shift-lock system ....................... 5-14
Transaxle ranges ........................ 5-13
B
Installing child-restraint
Battery
systems ....................................... 2-33
LATCH child-restraint
Emergency starting .................... 7-16
Maintenance ............................... 8-32
Specifications ............................. 10-4
Beep sounds
Ignition key reminder ................. 5-46
Seat belt warning beep ............... 5-46
Beeps
Tire inflation pressure warning
beep ............................................ 5-46
Before Starting the Engine .................. 4-5
After getting in ............................. 4-5
Before getting in .......................... 4-5
Body Lubrication .............................. 8-27
Bottle Holder ..................................... 6-52
systems ....................................... 2-40
Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors ... 3-10
Climate Control System ...................... 6-2
Gas specifications ...................... 10-6
Clock ................................................. 6-50
Cruise Control ................................... 5-19
Cup Holder ........................................ 6-51
Customer Assistance ........................... 9-2
D
Dashboard Illumination .................... 5-34
Daytime Running Lights ................... 5-48
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
D
F
Flasher
Defroster
Hazard warning .......................... 5-53
Headlights .................................. 5-47
Flat Tire ............................................... 7-3
Changing ...................................... 7-8
Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3
Fluids
Owner maintenance ................... 8-15
Fog Lights ......................................... 5-49
Foot Brake .......................................... 5-5
Front Seats
Rear window .............................. 5-52
Dimensions ....................................... 10-5
Door Locks ......................................... 3-7
Driving In Flooded Area ..................... 4-9
Driving Tips ........................................ 4-6
Automatic transaxle ................... 5-17
Break-in period ............................ 4-6
Driving in flooded area ................ 4-9
Hazardous driving ........................ 4-7
Money-saving suggestions ........... 4-6
Rocking the vehicle ...................... 4-8
Winter driving .............................. 4-8
(Electrically Operated Seats) ............... 2-5
Front Seats
(Manually Operated Seats) ................. 2-2
Fuel
E
Filler lid and cap ........................ 3-29
Gauge ......................................... 5-34
Requirements ............................... 4-2
Tank capacity ............................. 10-5
Fuses ................................................. 8-48
Panel description ........................ 8-50
Replacement ............................... 8-48
Emergency Starting ........................... 7-16
Flooded engine ........................... 7-16
Jump-starting .............................. 7-17
Push-starting .............................. 7-19
Emergency Towing ........................... 7-20
Emission Control System .................... 4-3
Engine
Coolant ....................................... 8-20
Exhaust gas .................................. 4-4
Hood release .............................. 3-30
Oil .............................................. 8-18
Overheating ................................ 7-14
Starting ......................................... 5-4
Engine Compartment Overview ........ 8-17
Engine Coolant
Overheating ................................ 7-14
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge ................................................ 5-33
Exhaust Gas ........................................ 4-4
Exterior Care ..................................... 8-55
G
Glove Box ......................................... 6-54
H
Hatch ................................................. 3-10
Luggage compartment cover ...... 3-12
Luggage strap ............................. 3-12
Hazard Warning Flasher .................... 5-53
Hazardous Driving .............................. 4-7
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
H
J
Jump-Starting .................................... 7-17
Headlights
Control ....................................... 5-47
K
Flashing ...................................... 5-48
High-low beam .......................... 5-47
Leveling ..................................... 5-48
HomeLink Wireless Control
Keyless Entry System ......................... 3-3
Keys .................................................... 3-2
System .............................................. 5-54
Hood Release .................................... 3-30
Horn .................................................. 5-53
L
Label Information ............................. 10-2
Lane-Change Signals ........................ 5-49
Liftgate .............................................. 3-13
Luggage compartment cover ...... 3-14
Luggage compartment net .......... 3-15
Light Bulbs
Replacement ............................... 8-38
Specifications ............................. 10-6
Lighting Control ............................... 5-47
Luggage Compartment Light ............ 6-48
I
Ignition
Keys ............................................. 3-2
Switch .......................................... 5-2
Illuminated Entry System ................. 6-46
Immobilizer System .......................... 3-33
Indicator Lights ................................. 5-35
Cruise Main ................................ 5-45
Cruise set .................................... 5-45
Headlight high-beam .................. 5-44
Security ...................................... 5-43
Shift position .............................. 5-44
TCS ............................................ 5-44
TCS OFF .................................... 5-45
Turn-signal/hazard warning ....... 5-45
Information Display .......................... 6-49
Ambient temperature display ..... 6-50
Audio display ............................. 6-51
Climate control display .............. 6-51
Clock .......................................... 6-50
Information display functions .... 6-49
Inside Trunk Release Lever ............... 3-21
Instrument Cluster ............................. 5-31
Interior Care ...................................... 8-58
Interior Lights ................................... 6-46
M
Maintenance
Introduction .................................. 8-2
Owner maintenance
precautions ................................. 8-16
Owner maintenance schedule ..... 8-15
Scheduled ..................................... 8-3
Manual Transaxle Operation ............... 5-9
Recommendations for shifting.... 5-10
Map Lights ........................................ 6-47
Mirrors
Outside mirrors .......................... 3-38
Rearview mirror ......................... 3-39
Money-Saving Suggestions ................ 4-6
Moonroof .......................................... 3-31
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
O
S
Odometer and Trip Meter .................. 5-32
Outside Mirrors ................................. 3-38
Overhead Console ............................. 6-53
Overhead Lights ................................ 6-47
Overheating....................................... 7-14
Overloading ...................................... 4-10
Seat Belt System
3-point type
(Except center-rear position) ...... 2-19
Automatic locking ...................... 2-18
Belt minder ................................. 2-28
Center-rear position .................... 2-23
Emergency locking .................... 2-17
Extender ..................................... 2-26
Pregnant women ........................ 2-17
Pretensioner and load limiting.... 2-21
Seat belt precautions .................. 2-15
Warning light/beep ..................... 2-28
P
Paint Damage .................................... 8-53
Parking Brake ..................................... 5-5
Parking in an Emergency .................... 7-2
Power Door Locks .............................. 3-9
Power Steering .................................. 5-18
Fluid ........................................... 8-23
Power Windows ................................ 3-22
Push-Starting ..................................... 7-19
Seats
Front seat
(Electrically operated seats) ......... 2-5
Front seat
(Manually operated seats) ............ 2-2
Rear seat ....................................... 2-9
R
Security System
Immobilizer system .................... 3-33
Theft-deterrent system ............... 3-35
Service Publications .......................... 9-44
Spare Tire and Tool Storage ................ 7-3
Specifications .................................... 10-4
Speedometer ...................................... 5-32
SRS Air Bags
Rear Door Child Safety Locks .......... 3-10
Rear Seat ............................................. 2-9
Rear Window Defroster .................... 5-52
Rear Window Washer ....................... 5-51
Rear Window Wiper.......................... 5-51
Rearview Mirror ................................ 3-39
Recreational Towing ......................... 7-21
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country ............................................. 9-15
Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 4-8
How the Air Bags Work ............. 2-52
Supplemental restraint systems
precautions ................................. 2-45
Starting the Engine.............................. 5-4
Steering Wheel .................................. 3-38
Horn ........................................... 5-53
Storage Box ...................................... 6-54
S
Safety Defects, Reporting ................. 9-42
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
S
T
Storage Compartments ...................... 6-53
Cargo securing loops .................. 6-55
Cargo sub-compartment ............. 6-55
Center box .................................. 6-53
Center console ............................ 6-54
Glove box ................................... 6-54
Overhead console ....................... 6-53
Storage box ................................ 6-54
Storage pocket ............................ 6-53
Storage Pocket .................................. 6-53
Sunshade ........................................... 3-32
Sunvisors .......................................... 6-46
Towing
Description ................................. 7-20
Emergency towing ..................... 7-20
Recreational towing ................... 7-21
Traction Control System (TCS) ........ 5-22
TCS indicator light ..................... 5-23
TCS OFF indicator light ............ 5-23
TCS OFF switch ........................ 5-23
Trip Meter ......................................... 5-32
Trunk Lid .......................................... 3-19
Inside trunk release lever ............ 3-21
Trunk Light ....................................... 3-20
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 5-49
T
V
Tachometer ........................................ 5-33
Temporary Spare Tire ....................... 8-36
Theft-Deterrent System ..................... 3-35
Tire Information ................................ 9-22
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 5-25
System error activation .............. 5-29
Tire pressure monitoring system
warning light .............................. 5-27
Tires and wheels ......................... 5-29
Tires
Flat tire ......................................... 7-3
Inflation pressure ........................ 8-33
Replacement ............................... 8-35
Rotation ...................................... 8-34
Snow tires .................................... 4-8
Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3
Specifications ............................. 10-7
Tire chains .................................... 4-9
Uniform tire quality grading system
(UTQGS) ................................... 9-20
Tool ..................................................... 7-3
Vanity Mirrors ................................... 6-46
Vehicle Information Labels ............... 10-2
W
Warning Lights ................................. 5-35
ABS ............................................ 5-37
Air bag system ........................... 5-39
Automatic transaxle ................... 5-41
Brake system .............................. 5-37
Charging system ......................... 5-38
Check engine.............................. 5-39
Door-ajar .................................... 5-41
Engine oil pressure ..................... 5-38
Front seat belt pretensioner
system ........................................ 5-39
Low fuel ..................................... 5-40
Low washer fluid level ............... 5-41
Seat belt ...................................... 5-40
Tire pressure monitoring
system ........................................ 5-41
Warranty ............................................ 9-12
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
W
Washer Fluid ..................................... 8-26
Weights ............................................. 10-6
Wheel Replacement .......................... 8-36
Windows
Power windows .......................... 3-22
Windshield Washer ........................... 5-51
Windshield Wipers ............................ 5-50
Blades replacement .................... 8-28
Winter Driving .................................... 4-8
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
See page
NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
Before Use
4
for specific information.
Getting
started
Immediate use
4
See page
for specific information.
Routing
Address
Book
Advanced use
5
See page
for specific information.
Voice
Recognition
Volume
Adjustment
If
necessary
If necessary
5
See page
for specific information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Please contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer if you are missing the
following accessory.
l Map Disc
CAUTION:
THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT.
HOWEVER THIS PRODUCT USES A VISIBLE/
INVISIBLE LASER BEAM WHICH COULD CAUSE
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE IF DIRECTED.
BE SURE TO OPERATE THIS PRODUCT
CORRECTLY AS INSTRUCTED.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT
OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Laser products:
Wave length: 650 nm
Laser power: No hazardous radiation is emitted with safety protection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Contents
Preparation
n Before Use
Accessories........................................................................................ 2
Laser products: .................................................................................. 2
Contents............................................................................................. 4
Safety Information .............................................................................. 6
Introduction ........................................................................................ 8
(Use This Product Safety), (Navigation System), (Screens),
(LCD (Liquid crystal display))
Names and Functions ...................................................................... 10
Immediate use
n Getting started
l Activation....................................................................................... 12
(Removing the Map Disc), (Buttons on the screen)
l Menu............................................................................................. 14
l Set Clock....................................................................................... 15
l Navigation Set Up ......................................................................... 16
(User Setting), (Quick POI Selection), (Language), (Map Configuration),
(Calibration), (Restore System Defaults)
l Screen Names and Functions....................................................... 25
(Screens Before Setting Route), (Screens During Route Guidance),
(Screen adjustments and settings)
l Screen change.............................................................................. 27
(Changing the Map Orientation/Scale)
n Routing
l Destination Entry and Route Search............................................. 28
(Change (Change Search Area)), (Address), (Point of interest),
(Emergency), (Memory Point), (Home), (Preset Destination),
(Previous Destination), (Intersection), (Freeway On/Off Ramp),
(Coordinates), (Select from map)
l Quick POI...................................................................................... 36
(Displaying POI(s) on a Map), (Local Search), (Deleting POI Markers),
(Showing POI Data)
l Character Entry............................................................................. 37
(To enter the street name, city name, and other.),
(To enter the house phone number, and other.)
l Direct Destination Input................................................................. 38
(Direct Destination Input), (Selecting Route)
l POI Icons on Maps / Delete Destination....................................... 39
(POI (Point of Interest) Icons), (Delete destination)
l Route Options............................................................................... 40
(Route Preferences), (Modification of Destination or Way Point Positions),
(Deletion of Destination or Way Points), (Detour), (Turn List),
(Display Preview), (Route Preview)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Advanced use
n Address Book
l Address Book................................................................................44
(Memory Point Storage), (Memory Point Confirmation and Modification),
(Preset Destinations or Home storage), (Memory Point Deletion), (All Memory
Point Deletion), (Displays Icons at Memory Points), (Avoid Area Storage),
(Avoid Area Confirmation and Modification), (Avoid Area Deletion),
(All Avoid Area Deletion), (Category Name Modification), (Previous
Destination Deletion), (All Preset Destination Deletion)
n Voice Recognition
l Voice Recognition..........................................................................48
(Voice Recognition Structure), (Select the Language),
(Basic Usage Pattern), (Cancel Voice Recognition), (Voice Recognition
Command)
n Volume Adjustment
l Volume Adjustment........................................................................50
If necessary
n If necessary
l Precautions/System Performance.................................................51
(Voice Guidance), (GPS), (Map Matching), (Positioning Accuracy),
(Route Guide), (Route Search)
l Troubleshooting .............................................................................55
(Verification First), (Error Messages)
l Maintenance..................................................................................58
(Care of the Product), (Handling and Care of Map Discs)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Safety Information
n Read this owner’s manual for your Navigation System carefully before using the system.
It contains instructions about how to use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for any problems resulting from failure to observe the instructions
given in this manual.
n This manual uses pictographs to show you how to use the product safely and to alert you to potential
dangers resulting from improper connections and operation. The meanings of the pictographs are
explained below. It is important that you fully understand the pictographs and explanations in order to
use this manual and the system properly.
The presence of this Warning symbol in the text is intended to
alert you to the importance of heeding the operation
Warning
instructions. Failure to heed the instructions may result in
Warning
severe injury or death.
n Do not keep your eyes fixed on the monitor screen or operate the system
while driving.
Do not change the settings and destination locations while driving. Minimize the time
spent on viewing the monitor screen and listening to the voice guidance while driving.
Operating the system will distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and can
cause accidents. Always stop the vehicle in a safe location and use the parking brake
before operating the system.
Warnings
n Always obey local traffic regulations.
Your guided route may include roads that are not open to vehicles or are closed due to
traffic regulations. Comply with the local traffic regulations and take another route.
n Do not use the unit when it is out of order.
If the unit is out of order (no image, no sound) or in an abnormal state (has foreign matter
in it, is exposed to water, is smoking, or smells), then turn it off immediately and consult
with an Expert dealer, we recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Using the unit in an
out-of-order condition may lead to accidents, fires, or electric shocks.
n Use the proper power supply.
This product is designed for operation with a negative grounded 12 V DC battery system.
n Do not disassemble.
Do not disassemble the product or attempt to repair it yourself. If the product needs to be
repaired, take it to an Expert dealer, we recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
The presence of this Caution symbol in the text is intended to
alert you to the importance of heeding the operation
instructions. Failure to heed the instructions may result in injury
or material damage.
Caution
Caution
Cautions
n Do not use the product where it is exposed to water, moisture, or dust.
Exposure to water, moisture, or dust may lead to smoke, fire, or other damage to the unit.
Make especially sure that the unit does not get wet in car washes or on rainy days.
n Keep the voice guidance volume at an appropriate level.
Keep the volume level low enough to be aware of road and traffic conditions while driving.
n Protect the Deck Mechanism.
Do not insert any foreign objects into the slot of this unit.
n This navigation system is designed exclusively for use in automobiles.
This navigation system should only be installed in an automobile. Do not install it in a
ship, aircraft, or any other vehicles except an automobile. Do not use it detached from the
vehicle.
n Do not insert or allow your hand or fingers to be caught in the unit.
To prevent injury, do not get your hand or fingers caught in moving parts or in the disc
slot. Especially watch out for infants.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Introduction
Use This Product Safety
n Extremely low or high temperatures may interfere with normal operation
The inside of the vehicle can become very hot or cold when it is parked for extended
periods in direct sunlight or in cold places with the engine turned off. The navigation system
may not operate normally under such circumstances. Turn off the navigation system until
the inside of the vehicle has cooled down or warmed up. If the system does not operate
thereafter, consult an Authorized Dealer, we recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Navigation System
This navigation system utilizes GPS* satellite signals, a speed sensor and gyrosensor to track
and display your vehicle’s current position, and to guide you from your starting point to your
destination along a calculated route.
* : GPS (Global Positioning System) is a position detecting system utilizing the signals from GPS satellites
deployed by the U.S. Defense Department.
Screens
Screens displayed in this manual may differ from those on the actual display.
LCD (Liquid crystal display)
Direct sunlight or other outside light sources makes it difficult to view the images on the display.
For moonroof-equipped vehicles, close the sunshade to better view the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Names and Functions
Infrared transmitter
Joystick
l Selects items
ENTER
by tilting it up, down, right, and left.
l Scrolls map.
ZOOM key
Changes the map scale.
ZOOM
RET
(
page 27)
RET key
Returns to the previous screen.
VOICE key
l Initiates vocal guidance for route
manoeuvres.
l Adjusts screen quality.
VOICE
(
page 26)
l To remove the remote control from the cradle press
PUSH
l When placing the remote control back in the cradle, press it until you hear it engage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Battery Inserting
À Open the
battery
compartment
cover.
POS (Position) key
Displays your current position.
POS
Á Insert the
new
batteries.
ENTER key
ENTER
MENU
l Executes a selected item.
l Displays pop up menu.
Note
Match the polarity of the batteries
MENU key
Select a menu.
with the
and
marks in the
(
page 14)
battery case.
 Close the
battery
compartment
cover.
TALK Switch
Use for switching to voice
recognition or canceling.
TALK
l
Battery: Two AA batteries (R6PU)
l Battery life: Approximately 5
months of normal use (when
using manganese batteries at
ambient temperatures)
l Battery replacement: Replace
the batteries as soon as possible
when the infrared receiver does
not respond properly to remote
control operations, or when the
remote control does not work.
Note
Make sure that there is not any
pressure applied to any of the
remote control buttons when
placing the remote control in the
console box. Pressure on any of
the buttons will drain the batteries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Activation
Insert the map disc into the unit to start the Mobile Navigation System.
n Map Disc
l Refer to “Handling and Care of Map Discs” to know how to handle a map
Cautions
disc (
page 58).
Note
l The map disc cannot be inserted or ejected while the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
l Remember that the battery can run down if the ignition switch is kept in the ON or ACC
position for a long time while the engine not running.
Turn the ignition switch
Note
to the ON position and
1
TILT
l
This display angle can be adjusted by pressing
.
press
OPEN/CLOSE
to open
the display.
TILT
When the
is
pressed, the display
angle changes in
stages.
l Press
to close the display.
OPEN/CLOSE
Insert the map disc
with the printed side
facing up.
Note
2
l The main unit is located under the front passenger
seat.
l Condensation may form on the optical lens or the
map disc inside the unit when the temperature in
the vehicle increases in a short time such as when
heating the car on a cold day. This condensation
may cause malfunctions. If so, unload the map disc
and do not operate the unit for approximately 1
hour. Wipe the condensation off the map disc with a
soft cloth.
If the unit does not operate correctly after 1 hour,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(CAUTION) screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Read CAUTION
carefully, and select
and press
Most functions are inhibited while the
vehicle is in motion.
3
Please read the handbook for operation
instructions.
Caution
.
ENTER
Always obey traffic regulations.
l The Current Position screen appears.
Note
ENTER
and press . You can also change the
page 20)
l You can select the language by select
selected language using Language Selection. (
l The CAUTION screen remains on the display unless you select
and press
.
ENTER
Removing the Map Disc
When the ignition switch is in the ACC position and press
(EJECT).
Do not get your hand or fingers caught in
moving parts or in the disc slot. This can
cause injuries. Children are inquisitive, try
to install or remove the map disc without
infants looking on.
Caution
EJECT
Buttons on the screen
ENTER
Select the buttons by using Joystick and press
Colors for unavailable buttons will be pale.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Menu
Menu appears when pressing
.
MENU
Destination Entry and Route Search (
page 28)
Address Book (
Cancel Guidance (
Route Options (
page 44)
page 39)
page 40)
Volume (
Set Clock (
page 50)
page 15)
Navigation Set Up (
page 16)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Set Clock
The current time is set using this function. Since time notification is provided by a GPS satellite.
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
ENTER
Open the [SET CLOCK] screen
Select
if you prefer 24-hour display;
for 12-hour display.
Select to move the setting ahead by one hour,
and similarly, select
hour.
to move it back by one
How to exit
.
Note
Minutes and seconds are adjusted by the GPS, however, it is necessary to
adjust hours under the following conditions:
l Driving across different time zones
l Daylight saving time start and end
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Navigation Set Up
l You can alter the map display conditions, the route guidance conditions and show the
system information.
n Stop your vehicle before the following operations.
Do not change the settings and destination locations while driving. Minimize the time
spent viewing the monitor screen and listening to the voice guidance while driving.
Operating the system will distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and may
Warning
cause an accident.
Always stop the vehicle in a safe location and put the parking brake on before operating
the system.
ENTER
Before Steps
Open
select
MENU
ENTER
(
(
(
page 17)
page 19)
page 20)
[NAVIGATION SETUP]
(
(
(
page 21)
page 22)
page 24)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
User Setting
Navigation Set Up
ENTER
select
MENU
ENTER
Before Steps
ENTER
select
ENTER
Open the
n Map Color
[USERSETTINGS]
screen
Select a screen color from
to
options.
n Map Mode
l Auto : The display will automatically switch between Day
and Night illumination mode when the headlights are
turned off and on respectively.
l Day
:
The display will be presented in Day illumination mode
regardless of whether the headlights are on or off.
l
Night : The display will be presented in Night illumination mode
regardless of whether the headlights are on or off.
n Distance
Select the distance unit from
or
.
n Average Speed
Set the average speed for each road to be driven.
(This function sets the standard speed (average vehicle speed
for each route) used for calculating the estimated arrival time
when calculating the route time.)
:
Average speed setting
:Changes back to default
n Road Restriction Warnings
The display of warnings during route guidance when passing
through areas with traffic restrictions can be turned on or off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
User Setting
Navigation Set Up
ENTER
select
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
Before Steps
ENTER
select
Open the
n Arrival Time
[USERSETTINGS]
screen
The time which is displayed until reaching the destination or a
way point can be set as an estimated arrival time or the
remaining time.
Select
to display the estimated arrival time, or
to
display the remaining time.
n Keyboard Layout
The layout of input keys can be selected as
or
.
n Clock
Allows selection of whether clock is to be displayed.
n Beep
Allows selection of whether beep will sound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Quick POI Selection
Navigation Set Up
This function allows you set the categories on the area displayed when the (Point of Interest)
menu is selected on the map. Quick POI enables you store up to six different kinds of
categories which you use most regularly.
ENTER
select
MENU
ENTER
1
2
ENTER
select
ENTER
Open the [QUICK POI SELECTION] screen
Select the button for Quick POI storage.
Note
l Select the category to be changed
:This button allows you to restore the factory
settings.
Select a category.
Once selected, subcategories will be displayed.
:Subcategories from all of the
individual categories will be
displayed together.
Select the subcategories to be displayed on the
map.
Repeat the above steps to add further POI markers displayed on the menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Language
Navigation Set Up
You can change the language of the menu and the voice guidance.
ENTER
select
MENU
ENTER
Before Steps
ENTER
select
ENTER
Open the [LANGUAGE] screen
Select your preferred language from the list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Map Configuration
Navigation Set Up
ENTER
select
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
Before Steps
ENTER
select
Open the
[MAP
CONFIGURATION]
screen
n Map Screen
Select single or dual map display.
Single map
Dual map
n Turn Guidance
Turn Arrow (on first screen)
While using route guidance, the
directions for the next junction where
you have to turn are shown as a Turn
Arrow in the upper right.
Turn List
While using route guidance, the
directions for the next junction where
you have to turn are shown as Turn
List.
Turn Arrow (on second screen)
While using route guidance, the
directions for the next junction where
you have to turn are shown as Turn
Arrow.
Note
Before a fork in the road, an enlarged diagram of the junction automatically
appears in a second screen.This is to make route guidance even clearer.
n Junction Detail
Select whether the Enlarged Junction diagram screen is displayed automatically.
n Freeway Information
Allows selection of whether the guidance screen is to be displayed while driving on a freeway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
Calibration
Navigation Set Up
This function allows you to correct any error in the position or direction of your vehicle display.
ENTER
MENU
Before Steps
select
Adjusting Current Position and Direction
ENTER
select
ENTER
Open the [Calibrate Position] screen
ENTER
Move to the correct position and select
.
Use
or
to adjust the direction in which you are
heading, and select
.
Distance
This function automatically corrects any error in the display of the current position
that might occur after tire replacement.
ENTER
select
ENTER
You will have to drive about 6 miles (10 km) before distance correction is complete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
select
Map Version
The map and software version numbers can be confirmed using this function.
ENTER
select
ENTER
Map and software versions are now displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23
Restore System Defaults
Navigation Set Up
This function replaces all the settings in the mobile navigation system with the initial default
settings.
ENTER
select
MENU
ENTER
Before Steps
ENTER
select
ENTER
Open the [SYSTEM DEFAULTS] screen
Select
.
If you execute Restore System Defaults, all of your stored setting data will be deleted.
[Default List]
Item
Initial condition
Menu names
Map Orientation
North up
Map display mode
Single-screen display
Map Display scale/Map scale for Dual-screen is not object of backup.
Display guidance language
Quick-POI map display
Single-screen: 10,000 map (1/16 mi)
English
All Off
Quick-POI Selection
A : Gas station
B : ATM
C : Police Station
D : Grocery store
E : All Restaurant
F : Hotel
Search Area
US9 (including Washington DC)
Map Color
1
Day/Night/Auto Setting
Distance Units (Miles/KM) (Global setting)
Volume Presets
Auto
Miles
4
Time display change (12h/24h)
Keyboard layout
Arrival Time
Navigation Setup (Clock)
Navigation Setup (Beep)
Map Configuration
Freeway Information
Guidance Screen
24h
ABC
Time
Off
On
Off
ON
Map screen
Turn Guidance Screen
Single
Turn List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Screen Names and Functions
Screens Before Setting Route
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ENTER
ENTER
Current position screen
RET
RET
Returns after a
few seconds.
(6)
(5)
(8)
(7) (9)
(1) Map Orientation control
page 27)
(7) Set Destination button
The destination, memory point or way point
(
(2) GPS (Global Positioning System) marker
will be set at the position pointed by
scroll screen.
in the
(
page 52)
(3) Clock
(8) Store Memory Point button
Stores markers on the map.
(9) POI (Point of Interest) Display button
Clock will be displayed when you set up
Clock on Navigation Set Up On.
(4) Vehicle marker
(
page 36)
Shows the current position and
direction of your vehicle.
(5) Scale display
Displays the scale of the map.
(6) Distance from current position
Displays the distance from the current
position to the position pointed by
.
Screens During Route Guidance
(3)
ENTER
(2)
(1)
RET
Returns after a
few seconds.
(5)
(4)
(1) Distance and Time to Destination display (3) Turn Arrow display
Displays the time* and distance to the
destination or way point.
Shows the direction to turn at the next
junction and the distance to the junction.
(4) Route Preferences button
Selecting this will display the next and
further information on the way point or
time and distance to the destination.
(* Either required time or estimated time
arrival)
(
page 40)
(5) Current Road Name
Shows the name of the road you are
currently driving on.
(2) Route display
Shows the provided route as a thick
blue line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Screen adjustments and settings
Display Menu screen will be shown when you press
(DISP) and hold.
VOICE
Note
Display Menu screen will be disappeared when they have been unused during a few seconds.
n Adjusting the screen quality
l Adjusts the screen brightness
Select "ADJ", and then "BRIGHT". The screen will brighten when scrolling to the right, or
darken when scrolling to the left.
l Adjusts the screen contrast
Select "ADJ", and then "CONTRAST". The screen will lighten when scrolling to the right, or
deepen when scrolling to the left.
Note
l Adjust by scrolling the Joystick to the right and left.
ENTER
l Restore the adjustment value to the default when selecting “RESET”, press
.
n Clearing the screen
ENTER
Select “DISP OFF”, press
and the screen will disappear.
The screen will appear again when pressing any buttons.
n Daytime screen/Night screen
The screen can be returned to the daytime screen when the headlights or running lights
are on. Press (DISPLAY) and hold, then select "DAY MODE" and press
.
VOICE
ENTER
l The screen can be returned to the daytime screen while the headlights or running lights
are on using the dashboard illumination switch in the dashboard (Black-out meter).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Changing the Map Orientation/Scale
Screen change
n Do not keep your eyes fixed on the monitor screen or operate the system
while driving
Do not change the settings and destination locations while driving. Minimize the time
spent viewing the monitor screen and listening to the voice guidance while driving.
Operating the system will distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and may
cause an accident. Always stop the vehicle in a safe location and use the parking brake
before operating the system.
Warning
l North Up: Geographic north is up.
Press
ENTER
1
2
Select
press
,
and
ENTER
Map
orientation
l
Head Up: The direction you are
heading is up.
l ZOOM OUT
ZOOM
1
l The map can be displayed in
13 steps with scales from
to
.
ZOOM
Map scale
l ZOOM IN
(more detail.)
Position before change
<Scale bar>
Imperial 1/32 mi
display (mile)
1/4 mi
(mile)
2 mi
(mile)
16 mi
(mile)
128 mi
(mile)
Metric
display
50 m
500 m
4 km
32 km
256 km
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Destination Entry and Route Search
l You can set the destination using various methods provided by the system.
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
Open the [DESTINATION
ENTRY] Menu
Change
(Change
Search Area)
Select
When narrowing
Open the
[DESTINATION
ENTRY] Menu
Select
down to city name
Select
Address
When narrowing
down to street name
Select
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
l
l
Do not keep your eyes fixed on the monitor screen or operate the system while driving.
Do not change the settings and destination locations while driving. Minimize the time spent
viewing the monitor screen and listening to the voice guidance while driving. Operating the system
will distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and may cause an accident. Always stop
the vehicle in a safe location before operating the system.
Route searches with the navigation system can include roads that you cannot drive on and roads that you
are prohibited from driving on due to traffic regulations. Please comply with the traffic regulations.
Warnings
Select the desired Search Area
: ID, OR, WA,
: CA, NV
: AZ, CO, MT, NM, UT, WY
: IA, KS, MN, MO, ND, NE, SD
: OK, TX
: AR, AL, LA, MS, TN
ENTER
: CT, MA, ME, NH, NJ, NY, RI, VT
: DC, DE, MD, PA, VA, WV
: FL, GA, NC, SC
: CANADA
: IL, IN, KY, MI, OH, WI
:
Cancel the
city selection.
Select
the
Enter
Select
the
Enter
Select
Direct
destination
input
:
the
the
Displays list of
5 city name
earest the
city
street
name
and
street
name
from
the
house
no.
s
n
name
from
the
(
current
position.
page 38)
select
list
list
Enter
the
Select
the
Enter
the
Select the
street name
from the list
:
Displays the
city name
city
city
street
name
and
input screen.
name
and
select
name
from
the
select
list
Select the
street name
from the list
Select the city
name from the
list
Enter
the
house
no.
Select
Enter the
street
name and
select
l
For Character Entry, please refer to page 37.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
Destination Entry and Route Search
When entering
Open the
[DESTINATION
ENTRY] Menu
Select
the destination
point directly
Select
When narrowing
down to city
name
Select
When narrowing
down to category
name
Point of
interest
Select
When narrowing
down to the
nearest facility
Select
When narrowing
down to a phone
number
Select
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Enter the
POI name
and select
Select the
POI from
the list
:
Cancel the
city selection.
Select the
city name
from the
list
:
Displays list
of 5 city
Select
names
nearest the
current
position.
Enter the
city name
andselect
Select the
city name
from the
list
:
Displays the
city name
input screen.
Select the
category
name from
the list
Select the
city center
name from
the list and
select
Enter the city
center name
and select
: Searches
for facilities close to the
nearest city hall.
: Searches
for facilities near the current
position.
Select
Select the
Category
name from
the list and
select
Scroll the map
as necessary
and select
: Searches for
facilities near the current
position.
Select the
facility from
the list and
:
Searches for registered
facilities at the destinations.
select
Enter the phone number
and select
l
For Character Entry, please refer to page 37.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Destination Entry and Route Search
When stopped
Select
Displays the police
station select screen.
Displays the hospital
select screen.
When driving
Emergency
Sets the destination to the
nearest police station
automatically.
Sets the destination to the
nearest hospital
automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Select the sort methods
: Sorts the police station or
the hospital by Distance.
Select the name from
the list
Select
: Sorts the police station or
the hospital by name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
Destination Entry and Route Search
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
Select
Open the
[DESTINATION
ENTRY] Menu
Memory Point
Select
Select
Home
Preset Destination
Previous Destination
Intersection
Select
Select
Select
Freeway On/
Off Ramp
Select
Select
Coordinates
Select from
map
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Select the desired Memory Point
: Display up to five previous suggestions.
: Display the five previous suggestions.
: The order of the displayed list can be changed.
Select the desired Preset Destination.
Select the Previous Destination.
Enter/Select the
1st street name
Enter/Select the 2nd
street name
Select
Enter/Select the
name of the
freeway
Select the
desired the
On Ramp or
the Off Ramp
name.
Select
or
Enter the latitude
: degrees
Enter the longitude
Select
: minutes
: seconds
l
For Character Entry, please refer to page 37.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Quick POI
l You can select one of the Six Categories on the menu or List Categories and then select the
POI(s) to be displayed on the map.
ENTER
Before Steps
ENTER
Select
Select the
Open the
[QUICK POI]
categories to be
displayed up to a
maximum of five.
l POI icon chart
Displaying
POI(s) on a
Map
(
page 39)
For categories
other than the six
displayed, select
and
select them from
the list shown.
Select the POI
you want to find
from the listed
categories.
After you make a
selection, the point of
interest you selected
appears on the map.
: Search POI
Local
Search
along the route
during the guidance
and show the list.
Deleting
POI
Markers
Displaying POI(s) on a Map (
above)
Before Steps
Display the POI.
Select the desired
POI by moving
top of the POI icon.
The name of the selected
POI appears.
Select
on
(Information)
The POI(s) data is
displayed.
Showing
POI Data
If no data is stored for the
selected POI, the POI
name is not displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Character Entry
Select the first several characters
on the screen. (Step 1)
Select your target
in the list.
Names of which spelling starts
with the entered character appear.
l If a desired name is not in
the list, go back to Step 1,
and try fewer characters.
Select
Select
Select
:
Display up to five previous
suggestions.
Select
:
Display the previous
suggestions.
To enter
the street
name, city
name, and
other.
:
:
Text flow (Right)
Text flow (Left)
:
The order of the displayed list
can be changed. (Displayed
list varies or
may not be
:
:
Move the cursor to the previous
position and delete a character.
The list appears.
displayed depending on what
was input.)
:
Additional text can be input.
(Use when inputting
additional characters after
the list is displayed.)
l Examples
Street: CANAL
-
Street: 52nd Ave.
Enter by selecting characters:
Enter by selecting characters:
C A
Street: MAIN STREET
5 2 n d
A
-
Enter by selecting characters:
M A I N
S
Select the characters on
the screen.
Select
To enter
the house
phone
number,
and other.
: Move the cursor to the
previous position and
delete a character.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
Direct Destination Input
Position the
ENTER
cursor on your
1
destination on
the map
Scroll the map and change the map
scale if necessary.
ENTER
2
Select
ENTER
Select
.
Route calculation will be carried out and the entire route
will be displayed on the map.
Direct
Destination
Input
3
4
Select
on your route (
points per trip.
(Way point) to set the address as a way point
page 44). You can set up to 5 way-
Select
.
Route guidance begins using displayed route.
Note
l If your desired route cannot be found,
(Route
Options) allows the route option settings to be changed.
page 40)
(
l Selecting
for five seconds or more will launch the
Demo mode.
Operate after Step 3 of [Direct Destination Input]
The calculation route can be selected from one of three
types namely, Quick (the fastest route), Altern. (the
standard route), or Short (the shortest route).
4
5
Selecting
Route
Select
(Information).
Details regarding the individual routes (i.e., required time
total distance, roads used, etc.)
Select either
,
, or
, and then select
when you have decided
on the route to be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
POI Icons on Maps / Delete Destination
n POI (Point of Interest) Icons
The following are POI icons shown on maps.
Restaurant
All restaurants
Travel
Community
Convention Center
Bus Station
Ferry Terminal
Hotel
American
Chinese
Court House
Government Offices
Higher Education
Hospital
Continental
Fast Food
French
Rental Car Agency
Rest Area
Train Station
Library
Park & Recreation
(All Search Areas)
Airport (All Search
Areas)
Italian
Japanese
Mexican
Police Station
School
Recreation
Casino
Seafood
City Center
Golf Course
Thai
Historical
Monument
Banking
Other Restaurants
Bank
ATM
Marina
Shopping
Museum
Grocery Store
Shopping Mall
Ski Resort
Other
Sports Complex
Performing Arts
Business Facility
Automotive
Tourist Attraction
(All Search Areas)
Automobile Club
Gas Station
Parking
Tourist Information
Winery
Amusement Park
(All Search Areas)
Auto Service &
Maintenance
ENTER
Delete
destination
MENU
Select
ENTER Select
ENTER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
l During route guidance you can
change the route options, stop or
check the route.
Route Options
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
Open the
[ROUTE
Select
OPTIONS] Menu
Route
Preferences
Select the
Select
button for the
location to be
modified.
Modification
of
Destination
or Way Point
Positions
Select the way points
to change the order.
Change the destination
and the passing order
of the destination and
way points.
Select the button
Deletion of
Destinationor
Way Points
corresponding to the
destination or way
point to be deleted.
Select
Select
Detour
The Enter Route
screen appears.
Turn List
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
n
Do not keep your eyes fixed on the monitor screen or operate the system while driving
Do not change the settings and destination locations while driving. Minimize the time spent
viewing the monitor screen and listening to the voice guidance while driving. Operating the system
will distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and may cause an accident. Always stop
the vehicle in a safe location and use the parking brake before operating the system.
Warning
Select
or
for toll
POS
ENTER
roads, major roads, and ferry
and restricted roads.
The route will not necessarily follow
the specified conditions.
Select
(Change
Location).
Move
press
to location and then
ENTER
.
Shows the map for the
destination/way points.
Press
order.
to change the
POS
POS
Select
:
:Cancel the deletion
:
Searches the detour routes at one, three, and five miles from the
present position to the selected routes. (Display range varies
according to the set distance of the selected route.) Whole
Route searches the route that detours from the present position
for all routes.
Select
the roads to be
avoided.
from
:
POS
:Cancel the setting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
Route Options
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
Open the
[ROUTE
Select
OPTIONS] Menu
Display
Preview
ENTER
Select
Route
Preview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Use the buttons displayed on-screen to carry out a simulation run.
: Move the start point.
: Carry out a simulation run in the direction of the start point. When the Simulation starts the button will
be displayed as
: Stop the simulation run.
Carry out a simulation run in the direction of the destination. When the Simulation starts the button will
be displayed as , and when selected, it will cause the Simulation to advance quickly.
, and when selected, it will cause the Simulation to advance quickly.
:
: Move to the destination.
: Displays the [EDIT ROUTE PREVIEW] screen.
: Stops at the destination or the next way-point.
: Stops at a point of interest which has been setup on the route.
: Delete the POI which has been selected.
RET
POIs: Display the six POIs from Quick-POI storage. When one of these is
selected, it will be displayed on the map; furthermore,
can be
selected to display items other than shown here. For more details, refer to page 19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
43
l You can, edit, or delete any
marked point.
Address Book
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
Open the
[ADDRESS
BOOK]
Memory Point
Storage
Select
MemoryPoint
Confirmation
and
Modification
Preset
Destinations
or Home
storage
Memory
Point
Deletion
All Memory
Point
Deletion
Show all
icon
or
Displays
Icons at
Memory
Points
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Set a memory
point using your
preferred method.
Select a memory
point to be modified
: Allows the display icon to be
selected. Page 1 and 2 contain
standard icons, whereas the
With Sound page contains icons
which also playback sounds.
(With direction icon function)
The beep alert only activates
when the vehicle approaches to
within about 500m of the memory
point from the set direction.
: Allows the name to be changed.
When editing has been
completed, select
.
Furthermore, select
to
display names on the map, or
if these names are not to
be displayed.
: Allows memory points to be
checked and modified on the
map screen. After checking.
ENTER
: Allows the telephone number to
be modified. When editing has
been completed, select
.
Select a memory
point to be stored
in Preset
Destinations or
Home.
:
:Changes the category to
Preset Destinations
Allows the storage
category to be
changed. Select the
buttoncorresponding
to the new category.
:Changes the category to
Home
Select a memory
point to be
deleted.
: Cancel the deletion.
: Cancel the deletion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
Address Book
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
Open the
[ADDRESS
BOOK]
Avoid Area
Storage
Select
Avoid Area
Confirmation
and
Modification
Avoid Area
Deletion
All Avoid
Area
Deletion
Category
Name
Modification
Select
Previous
Destination
Deletion
All Preset
Destination
Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
:
:
:
Changes the detour
position
Reduces the size of the
avoid area.
Increases the size of
the avoid area.
Select an avoid
area using your
preferred method.
Select an avoid area
to be modified.
POS
:
Allows the name to be
changed. When editing has
been completed, select
. Furthermore, select
to display names on
the map, or
if these
names are not to be
displayed.
: Allows avoid area
Extends
the detour
range
to be checked and
modified on the
map screen.
After checking.
Shortens
the detour
range
Changes
the detour
position
Select an avoid
area to be deleted.
: Cancel the deletion.
Cancel the deletion.
:
Select a destination to
be deleted.
: Cancel the deletion.
: The order of the
displayed list can be
changed.
: Cancel the deletion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
l
Voice control can be carried out by simply
TALK
Pressing
and using a voice command
Voice Recognition
(
page 49) spoken into the microphone.
l Microphone surface
Voice entry recognition.
MICROPHONE
Voice
Recognition
Structure
l
(Steering Wheel)
TALK
Use for switching to voice recognition or canceling.
TALK Switch
Set up the language in advance.
Press
MENU
1
2
Select the
Language
ENTER
ENTER
select
select
ENTER
select
Select your preferred language from the list
3
Press
(Steering Wheel)
TALK
Basic
1
2
1
Usage
Pattern
Speak the desired voice command
Cancel
Long press
(Steering Wheel)
TALK
Voice
(Press it more than 0.7 seconds.)
Recognition
Note
After the navigation system has been set, voice recognition needs approximately 2 minutes
for activation on preparation. Wait momentarily.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Avoiding Voice Recognition Errors.
Read the notes listed below to allow the Voice Recognition function to recognize your voice properly.
l Speak a voice command clearly.
l Keep yourself in a safe driving position. Do not face or approach the microphone to make a
voice command to recognize.
Voice recognition may fail to recognize your command due to voice tone. If this happens,
change the tone of your voice by speaking more loudly and clearly.
l
Keep the inside of the vehicle quiet when making a voice command. Your command may be compromised
by noises made by people, blinkers, the horn, vehicle vibration, and noises from outside the vehicle.
l Use the language you selected in voice recognition.
Voice Recognition Command
The following voice commands can be used with voice control.
School
(Go to/Previous) Starting Point
[Go to] Previous Destination
[Go to] Preset Destination [Number] 1
[Go to] Preset Destination [Number] 2
[Go to] Preset Destination [Number] 3
[Go to] Preset Destination [Number] 4
[Go to] Preset Destination [Number] 5
Cancel
Shortcut Commands
[Show] Current (Position/Location)
[Show] Map
Repeat [Voice] [Guidance]
Historical Monument
Cancel
Amusement Park
Casino
Golf Course
Marina
Map Operation Commands
Museum
Zoom In
Ski Resort/Skiing
Zoom Out
Sports Complex/Stadium
Performing Arts
Tourist Attraction
Tourist Information
Guidance Commands
Louder
Softer
Zoom In Maximum
Zoom Out Maximum
Right Map Zoom In
Right Map Zoom Out
[Show] (Whole/Entire) Route [Map]
[Show] Next Way Point [Map]
Show First Way Point [Map]
Show Second Way Point [Map]
Show Third Way Point [Map]
Show Fourth Way Point [Map]
Show Fifth Way Point [Map]
Show Destination [Map]
(Delete/Cancel) Next Way Point
Yes
Winery
Right Map (Zoom In Maximum/
Restaurant/I'm Hungry/Show Restaurant
American Restaurant/American Food
Chinese Restaurant/Chinese Food
Continental Restaurant/Continental Food
Fast Food/Fast Food Restaurant
French Restaurant/French Food
Italian Restaurant/Italian Food
Japanese Restaurant/Japanese Food
Mexican Restaurant/Mexican Food
Seafood Restaurant/Seafood
Thai Restaurant/Thai Food
Other Restaurant/Other Food
Grocery Store
Shopping Mall
Airport
Bus Station
Ferry Terminal
Hotel
Rental Car Agency
Rest Area
Train Station
Minimum Scale)
Right Map (Zoom Out Maximum/Maximum Scale)
[Change to/Show] North up [Mode]
[Change to/Show] Heading up [Mode]
[Change] Map Direction
Right Map [Change to/Show] North up [Mode]
Right Map [Change to/Show] Heading Up [Mode]
Right Map [Change Map] Direction
[Show/Change to] Dual Map [Mode]
[Show/Change to] Single Map [Mode]
(Store/Mark) [This Point]
POI Display Commands
Automobile Club
No
(Delete/Cancel) Destination
(Delete/Cancel) All Way Points and
Destination
Voice Guidance Off
Voice Guidance On
Quick
Alternative
Short
Detour
Gas Station/Gas
Parking/Parking Lot/Parking Garage/Car Park
Auto Service & Maintenance/Auto Service
ATM
Bank
Detour Entire Route
Town Center/City Center
Convention Center/Exhibition Center
Court House
Government Offices
Higher Education/University/College
Hospital
Library
Parks & Recreation/College
Police Station
[Change to] Arrow (Guide/Guidance)
[Change to] Turn List (Guide/Guidance)
[Change to] Freeway (Guide/Guidance)
[Change to] Intersection (Guide/Guidance)
Display Commands
display [set] day [mode]
display [set] night [mode]
display [set] auto [mode]
Business Facility
POI Off
Destination Operation Commands
[Go] Home
Enter Destination
Add to Waypoint
( ): Indicates the commands to be the object of “/”
[]: Recognizes without saying the command in “[]”
“/”: Recognizes when saying either commands before and after “/”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
Volume Adjustment
You can adjust the volume control for the voice guidance.
ENTER
Before Steps
select
MENU
ENTER
Open the [VOLUME] screen
Select the appropriate button to set the
volume between
(maximum).
(minimum) and
1
2
:Sound output will be muted.
POS
Press the
current vehicle position screen.
button to return to the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Precautions/System Performance
Voice Guidance
l The navigation system is just a support system for the driver. The driver should
always pay attention to the traffic situation to safely make decisions. You may
be unable at times to arrive at your destination due to out-of-date information
on a map disc. You should be especially careful when selecting an urgent
destination such as a hospital or a police station.
Warnings
l Your route may sometimes include roads that are not open to vehicles or are
closed due to traffic regulations. Please comply with the local traffic
regulations.
l Do not change the settings and destination locations while driving. Minimize
the time spent viewing the monitor screen and listening to the voice guidance
while driving. Operating the system will distract the driver from looking ahead
of the vehicle and may cause an accident. Always stop the vehicle in a safe
location and use the parking brake before operating the system.
Voice guidance has the following functions:
n Intersection guidance
l The system voice announces the distance to an upcoming turn and the turning direction.
This guidance function is automatic. Therefore, you do not have to set it, and it cannot be
disabled.
l The system vocally announces the distance to an upcoming highway branching point or
junction.
Route
Second branching point
First branching point
150m
Roundabout.
Take the second
exit.
Left turn ahead,
then right turn.
100m
In 700m left turn.
When two intersections are close together, the
voice guidance may be late.
When two roundabouts are close together, the
voice guidance for the second may be late.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
GPS
GPS is a position detecting system utilizing the signals
from GPS satellites deployed by the U.S. Department of
Defense. The Mobile Navigation System uses input from
three or more satellites and calculates the vehicle position
based on the principle of triangulation.
The positioning accuracy of the system corresponds to the
error display of the GPS which is from about 30 to 200 meters
.
l If you are using the system for the first time, or if you have not used it for some time, it takes
about 5 minutes (or about 2 minutes in open areas) to calculate your vehicle’s position.
n GPS signal reception is poor in the following places
In tunnels
Among high-rise buildings Under elevated roads
In wooded areas
l The GPS satellites are controlled by the U.S. Defense Department, which may intentionally
lower positioning accuracy. In such cases, there may be vehicle position deviations.
l There may be vehicle position deviations for some time until GPS signals are received after
turning on the ignition.
Map Matching
This function compares your vehicle’s tracking data with the road data on the map
disc, applies dead reckoning to determine the road you are driving on, and displays
your vehicle on that road on the map.
l Intelligent map matching addresses the following problems to achieve high accuracy in
vehicle positioning.
Position Correction for Elevated Roads
Position accuracy is improved by detecting if the vehicle is
running on or under an elevated road.
Position Correction for Parking Garages
Position accuracy is improved by detecting if the vehicle is
driving in an elevated or underground parking garage.
High-precision Gyrosensor
A gyro detects turns with an accuracy of 0.05° per second.
Combined with a speed sensor, it enables the system to
display the current vehicle position even where GPS signals
may be blocked.
l Using a spare tire in place of the regular one may cause vehicle position deviations.
l Any difference between the direction which your vehicle actually travels and that shown on
the map is automatically eliminated by azimuth correction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Precautions/System Performance
Positioning Accuracy
In the following situations, your vehicle position may not be displayed correctly on the
map. But, as you keep driving, your vehicle position will be automatically corrected
utilizing map matching and GPS data.
Running on an
elevated road
Making a turn after Running on a steep Running on a spiral Entering an intersection
driving on a long
straight road
mountain road
road
where a road branches
off at a small angle
CAR FERRY
STOP
T
OP
Running on gridiron Running on a
Snaking on a wide When your vehicle After getting off a
layout of roads
slippery road with
tire chains
road
is on a turntable
with the ignition
turned off
ferryboat or vehicle
train
Route Guide
Although you may encounter the following problems in route guide, there is nothing
wrong with the system.
In 300 m
right turn
Left turn
ahead
For certain intersection shapes,
For certain intersection shapes,
Voice guidance for the planned
the upcoming turn or the name of you may be prompted to turn right route may continue even after you
the intersection may not be
announced.
or left When you should actually
stay on the same road.
have deviated from that route
such as having turned too early.
300m
In 300 m
right turn
0m
Some points where the road
The Intersection Zoom Map may The announced distance to an
divides on highways or toll roads not always agree with the actual
upcoming turn may differ slightly
from reality.
may not be displayed or
announced.
shape of the intersection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53
The navigation system is just a support system for the driver. The driver should always pay
attention to the traffic situation to safely make decisions. You may be unable to arrive at your
destination due to out-of-date information on a map disc. You should be especially careful
when selecting an urgent destination such as a hospital or a police station.
Warning
Route Search
Although you may encounter the following problems in a route search, there is nothing
wrong with the system.
The guide map may
It may also show roads
show roads that are not
that are out of use due
passable due to closure
to the opening of a new
in winter or for other
road or for other
reasons.
It may also show
roads that only permit
one-way traffic.
reasons.
Road
out of
use
Destination
?
?
?
which
exit?
Depending upon the shape of
roundabout (rotary), the guide
map may show a wrong exit.
?
• There may be cases
where the route remains
unchanged after another
search.
• A congested route may
be shown.
Destination
?
?
?
Destination
It may show a
common road under
or over an elevated
road.
The route shown only
reaches a point near
your destination if your
destination has no
direct access road or
the road is too narrow.
It may show a route
where you'll have to
make a U-turn.
?
Destination
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Verification First
Troubleshooting
Note
There may be some problems due to operational errors or mistakes. Please read this manual
again and verify that there really is a problem before calling an Expert Dealer, we recommend
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to ask for repair services.
Symptom
Check point
No picture
l Check if a fuse has blown.
Consult an Expert Dealer, we recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
l Check if the voltage level of the vehicle battery is low.
Display does
not open or
close
Recharge the battery or change batteries.
l Check if the vehicle position changed when ACC was set to
OFF.
When, for example,
The vehicle
position is not
correct
• The vehicle was transported by a ferry boat.
• The vehicle was rotated on a turn table in a parking lot.
• The vehicle was transported by a tow track or other such
vehicle.
Drive the vehicle for a while where you are receiving
GPS signals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
Symptom
Check point
No GPS
symbols are
displayed
l GPS signals may not be received because of obstructions.
After moving the vehicle away from obstructions, the GPS
signals can be received.
The vehicle
position is not
displayed
l Check if the mode is set to the current position screen.
Press
POS
l Check if the volume control for the voice guidance has been
turned off.
l Check if the vehicle is off the route.
Repeat the route search while checking the route guide
screen.
l Check if you are driving the vehicle in the wrong direction on
No voice
guidance
the route.
Repeat the route search checking the direction of the
destination.
Buttons on the
remote control
do not beep
l Check if [Beep] is set to [Off] (
page 18).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
Error message
Solution
l
The disc is not installed.
Check if the disk is installed. If installed, check if the
installed disk is correct.
Please insert a
MAP DVD.
MAP DVD-Read
Error
l
The disc is wet, dirty, scratched, or upside down, or the disc
cannot be played with this unit or the incorrect disk is installed.
Eject the disc and check it.
The disc
installed is not
a MAP DVD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
Maintenance
Care of the Product
n Cleaning this product
Use a dry, soft cloth to wipe it.
n Cautions for cleaning
Never use solvents such as benzene and thinners, they could mar the surface of the unit.
n Map disc
If you require the latest map disc, consult an Expert Dealer, we recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Handling and Care of Map Discs
n How to hold the disc
Label side
l Do not touch the underside of the disc.
l Do not scratch the disc.
l Do not bend the disc.
l When not in use, keep the disc in the case.
n Disc Cleaning
l Use a dry, soft cloth to wipe from the center outward.
<Right>
<Wrong>
n Do not leave discs in the following places:
l Direct sunlight
l Near car heaters
l In dirty, dusty and damp areas
l On seats and dashboards
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
|